diff options
Diffstat (limited to '')
| -rw-r--r-- | src/vdbe.c | 8860 |
1 files changed, 8860 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/src/vdbe.c b/src/vdbe.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4eb1c03 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/vdbe.c @@ -0,0 +1,8860 @@ +/* +** 2001 September 15 +** +** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of +** a legal notice, here is a blessing: +** +** May you do good and not evil. +** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others. +** May you share freely, never taking more than you give. +** +************************************************************************* +** The code in this file implements the function that runs the +** bytecode of a prepared statement. +** +** Various scripts scan this source file in order to generate HTML +** documentation, headers files, or other derived files. The formatting +** of the code in this file is, therefore, important. See other comments +** in this file for details. If in doubt, do not deviate from existing +** commenting and indentation practices when changing or adding code. +*/ +#include "sqliteInt.h" +#include "vdbeInt.h" + +/* +** Invoke this macro on memory cells just prior to changing the +** value of the cell. This macro verifies that shallow copies are +** not misused. A shallow copy of a string or blob just copies a +** pointer to the string or blob, not the content. If the original +** is changed while the copy is still in use, the string or blob might +** be changed out from under the copy. This macro verifies that nothing +** like that ever happens. +*/ +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG +# define memAboutToChange(P,M) sqlite3VdbeMemAboutToChange(P,M) +#else +# define memAboutToChange(P,M) +#endif + +/* +** The following global variable is incremented every time a cursor +** moves, either by the OP_SeekXX, OP_Next, or OP_Prev opcodes. The test +** procedures use this information to make sure that indices are +** working correctly. This variable has no function other than to +** help verify the correct operation of the library. +*/ +#ifdef SQLITE_TEST +int sqlite3_search_count = 0; +#endif + +/* +** When this global variable is positive, it gets decremented once before +** each instruction in the VDBE. When it reaches zero, the u1.isInterrupted +** field of the sqlite3 structure is set in order to simulate an interrupt. +** +** This facility is used for testing purposes only. It does not function +** in an ordinary build. +*/ +#ifdef SQLITE_TEST +int sqlite3_interrupt_count = 0; +#endif + +/* +** The next global variable is incremented each type the OP_Sort opcode +** is executed. The test procedures use this information to make sure that +** sorting is occurring or not occurring at appropriate times. This variable +** has no function other than to help verify the correct operation of the +** library. +*/ +#ifdef SQLITE_TEST +int sqlite3_sort_count = 0; +#endif + +/* +** The next global variable records the size of the largest MEM_Blob +** or MEM_Str that has been used by a VDBE opcode. The test procedures +** use this information to make sure that the zero-blob functionality +** is working correctly. This variable has no function other than to +** help verify the correct operation of the library. +*/ +#ifdef SQLITE_TEST +int sqlite3_max_blobsize = 0; +static void updateMaxBlobsize(Mem *p){ + if( (p->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob))!=0 && p->n>sqlite3_max_blobsize ){ + sqlite3_max_blobsize = p->n; + } +} +#endif + +/* +** This macro evaluates to true if either the update hook or the preupdate +** hook are enabled for database connect DB. +*/ +#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK +# define HAS_UPDATE_HOOK(DB) ((DB)->xPreUpdateCallback||(DB)->xUpdateCallback) +#else +# define HAS_UPDATE_HOOK(DB) ((DB)->xUpdateCallback) +#endif + +/* +** The next global variable is incremented each time the OP_Found opcode +** is executed. This is used to test whether or not the foreign key +** operation implemented using OP_FkIsZero is working. This variable +** has no function other than to help verify the correct operation of the +** library. +*/ +#ifdef SQLITE_TEST +int sqlite3_found_count = 0; +#endif + +/* +** Test a register to see if it exceeds the current maximum blob size. +** If it does, record the new maximum blob size. +*/ +#if defined(SQLITE_TEST) && !defined(SQLITE_UNTESTABLE) +# define UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(P) updateMaxBlobsize(P) +#else +# define UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(P) +#endif + +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG +/* This routine provides a convenient place to set a breakpoint during +** tracing with PRAGMA vdbe_trace=on. The breakpoint fires right after +** each opcode is printed. Variables "pc" (program counter) and pOp are +** available to add conditionals to the breakpoint. GDB example: +** +** break test_trace_breakpoint if pc=22 +** +** Other useful labels for breakpoints include: +** test_addop_breakpoint(pc,pOp) +** sqlite3CorruptError(lineno) +** sqlite3MisuseError(lineno) +** sqlite3CantopenError(lineno) +*/ +static void test_trace_breakpoint(int pc, Op *pOp, Vdbe *v){ + static int n = 0; + n++; +} +#endif + +/* +** Invoke the VDBE coverage callback, if that callback is defined. This +** feature is used for test suite validation only and does not appear an +** production builds. +** +** M is the type of branch. I is the direction taken for this instance of +** the branch. +** +** M: 2 - two-way branch (I=0: fall-thru 1: jump ) +** 3 - two-way + NULL (I=0: fall-thru 1: jump 2: NULL ) +** 4 - OP_Jump (I=0: jump p1 1: jump p2 2: jump p3) +** +** In other words, if M is 2, then I is either 0 (for fall-through) or +** 1 (for when the branch is taken). If M is 3, the I is 0 for an +** ordinary fall-through, I is 1 if the branch was taken, and I is 2 +** if the result of comparison is NULL. For M=3, I=2 the jump may or +** may not be taken, depending on the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL flags in p5. +** When M is 4, that means that an OP_Jump is being run. I is 0, 1, or 2 +** depending on if the operands are less than, equal, or greater than. +** +** iSrcLine is the source code line (from the __LINE__ macro) that +** generated the VDBE instruction combined with flag bits. The source +** code line number is in the lower 24 bits of iSrcLine and the upper +** 8 bytes are flags. The lower three bits of the flags indicate +** values for I that should never occur. For example, if the branch is +** always taken, the flags should be 0x05 since the fall-through and +** alternate branch are never taken. If a branch is never taken then +** flags should be 0x06 since only the fall-through approach is allowed. +** +** Bit 0x08 of the flags indicates an OP_Jump opcode that is only +** interested in equal or not-equal. In other words, I==0 and I==2 +** should be treated as equivalent +** +** Since only a line number is retained, not the filename, this macro +** only works for amalgamation builds. But that is ok, since these macros +** should be no-ops except for special builds used to measure test coverage. +*/ +#if !defined(SQLITE_VDBE_COVERAGE) +# define VdbeBranchTaken(I,M) +#else +# define VdbeBranchTaken(I,M) vdbeTakeBranch(pOp->iSrcLine,I,M) + static void vdbeTakeBranch(u32 iSrcLine, u8 I, u8 M){ + u8 mNever; + assert( I<=2 ); /* 0: fall through, 1: taken, 2: alternate taken */ + assert( M<=4 ); /* 2: two-way branch, 3: three-way branch, 4: OP_Jump */ + assert( I<M ); /* I can only be 2 if M is 3 or 4 */ + /* Transform I from a integer [0,1,2] into a bitmask of [1,2,4] */ + I = 1<<I; + /* The upper 8 bits of iSrcLine are flags. The lower three bits of + ** the flags indicate directions that the branch can never go. If + ** a branch really does go in one of those directions, assert right + ** away. */ + mNever = iSrcLine >> 24; + assert( (I & mNever)==0 ); + if( sqlite3GlobalConfig.xVdbeBranch==0 ) return; /*NO_TEST*/ + /* Invoke the branch coverage callback with three arguments: + ** iSrcLine - the line number of the VdbeCoverage() macro, with + ** flags removed. + ** I - Mask of bits 0x07 indicating which cases are are + ** fulfilled by this instance of the jump. 0x01 means + ** fall-thru, 0x02 means taken, 0x04 means NULL. Any + ** impossible cases (ex: if the comparison is never NULL) + ** are filled in automatically so that the coverage + ** measurement logic does not flag those impossible cases + ** as missed coverage. + ** M - Type of jump. Same as M argument above + */ + I |= mNever; + if( M==2 ) I |= 0x04; + if( M==4 ){ + I |= 0x08; + if( (mNever&0x08)!=0 && (I&0x05)!=0) I |= 0x05; /*NO_TEST*/ + } + sqlite3GlobalConfig.xVdbeBranch(sqlite3GlobalConfig.pVdbeBranchArg, + iSrcLine&0xffffff, I, M); + } +#endif + +/* +** An ephemeral string value (signified by the MEM_Ephem flag) contains +** a pointer to a dynamically allocated string where some other entity +** is responsible for deallocating that string. Because the register +** does not control the string, it might be deleted without the register +** knowing it. +** +** This routine converts an ephemeral string into a dynamically allocated +** string that the register itself controls. In other words, it +** converts an MEM_Ephem string into a string with P.z==P.zMalloc. +*/ +#define Deephemeralize(P) \ + if( ((P)->flags&MEM_Ephem)!=0 \ + && sqlite3VdbeMemMakeWriteable(P) ){ goto no_mem;} + +/* Return true if the cursor was opened using the OP_OpenSorter opcode. */ +#define isSorter(x) ((x)->eCurType==CURTYPE_SORTER) + +/* +** Allocate VdbeCursor number iCur. Return a pointer to it. Return NULL +** if we run out of memory. +*/ +static VdbeCursor *allocateCursor( + Vdbe *p, /* The virtual machine */ + int iCur, /* Index of the new VdbeCursor */ + int nField, /* Number of fields in the table or index */ + u8 eCurType /* Type of the new cursor */ +){ + /* Find the memory cell that will be used to store the blob of memory + ** required for this VdbeCursor structure. It is convenient to use a + ** vdbe memory cell to manage the memory allocation required for a + ** VdbeCursor structure for the following reasons: + ** + ** * Sometimes cursor numbers are used for a couple of different + ** purposes in a vdbe program. The different uses might require + ** different sized allocations. Memory cells provide growable + ** allocations. + ** + ** * When using ENABLE_MEMORY_MANAGEMENT, memory cell buffers can + ** be freed lazily via the sqlite3_release_memory() API. This + ** minimizes the number of malloc calls made by the system. + ** + ** The memory cell for cursor 0 is aMem[0]. The rest are allocated from + ** the top of the register space. Cursor 1 is at Mem[p->nMem-1]. + ** Cursor 2 is at Mem[p->nMem-2]. And so forth. + */ + Mem *pMem = iCur>0 ? &p->aMem[p->nMem-iCur] : p->aMem; + + int nByte; + VdbeCursor *pCx = 0; + nByte = + ROUND8P(sizeof(VdbeCursor)) + 2*sizeof(u32)*nField + + (eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE?sqlite3BtreeCursorSize():0); + + assert( iCur>=0 && iCur<p->nCursor ); + if( p->apCsr[iCur] ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE*/ + sqlite3VdbeFreeCursorNN(p, p->apCsr[iCur]); + p->apCsr[iCur] = 0; + } + + /* There used to be a call to sqlite3VdbeMemClearAndResize() to make sure + ** the pMem used to hold space for the cursor has enough storage available + ** in pMem->zMalloc. But for the special case of the aMem[] entries used + ** to hold cursors, it is faster to in-line the logic. */ + assert( pMem->flags==MEM_Undefined ); + assert( (pMem->flags & MEM_Dyn)==0 ); + assert( pMem->szMalloc==0 || pMem->z==pMem->zMalloc ); + if( pMem->szMalloc<nByte ){ + if( pMem->szMalloc>0 ){ + sqlite3DbFreeNN(pMem->db, pMem->zMalloc); + } + pMem->z = pMem->zMalloc = sqlite3DbMallocRaw(pMem->db, nByte); + if( pMem->zMalloc==0 ){ + pMem->szMalloc = 0; + return 0; + } + pMem->szMalloc = nByte; + } + + p->apCsr[iCur] = pCx = (VdbeCursor*)pMem->zMalloc; + memset(pCx, 0, offsetof(VdbeCursor,pAltCursor)); + pCx->eCurType = eCurType; + pCx->nField = nField; + pCx->aOffset = &pCx->aType[nField]; + if( eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ){ + pCx->uc.pCursor = (BtCursor*) + &pMem->z[ROUND8P(sizeof(VdbeCursor))+2*sizeof(u32)*nField]; + sqlite3BtreeCursorZero(pCx->uc.pCursor); + } + return pCx; +} + +/* +** The string in pRec is known to look like an integer and to have a +** floating point value of rValue. Return true and set *piValue to the +** integer value if the string is in range to be an integer. Otherwise, +** return false. +*/ +static int alsoAnInt(Mem *pRec, double rValue, i64 *piValue){ + i64 iValue; + iValue = sqlite3RealToI64(rValue); + if( sqlite3RealSameAsInt(rValue,iValue) ){ + *piValue = iValue; + return 1; + } + return 0==sqlite3Atoi64(pRec->z, piValue, pRec->n, pRec->enc); +} + +/* +** Try to convert a value into a numeric representation if we can +** do so without loss of information. In other words, if the string +** looks like a number, convert it into a number. If it does not +** look like a number, leave it alone. +** +** If the bTryForInt flag is true, then extra effort is made to give +** an integer representation. Strings that look like floating point +** values but which have no fractional component (example: '48.00') +** will have a MEM_Int representation when bTryForInt is true. +** +** If bTryForInt is false, then if the input string contains a decimal +** point or exponential notation, the result is only MEM_Real, even +** if there is an exact integer representation of the quantity. +*/ +static void applyNumericAffinity(Mem *pRec, int bTryForInt){ + double rValue; + u8 enc = pRec->enc; + int rc; + assert( (pRec->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Int|MEM_Real|MEM_IntReal))==MEM_Str ); + rc = sqlite3AtoF(pRec->z, &rValue, pRec->n, enc); + if( rc<=0 ) return; + if( rc==1 && alsoAnInt(pRec, rValue, &pRec->u.i) ){ + pRec->flags |= MEM_Int; + }else{ + pRec->u.r = rValue; + pRec->flags |= MEM_Real; + if( bTryForInt ) sqlite3VdbeIntegerAffinity(pRec); + } + /* TEXT->NUMERIC is many->one. Hence, it is important to invalidate the + ** string representation after computing a numeric equivalent, because the + ** string representation might not be the canonical representation for the + ** numeric value. Ticket [343634942dd54ab57b7024] 2018-01-31. */ + pRec->flags &= ~MEM_Str; +} + +/* +** Processing is determine by the affinity parameter: +** +** SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER: +** SQLITE_AFF_REAL: +** SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC: +** Try to convert pRec to an integer representation or a +** floating-point representation if an integer representation +** is not possible. Note that the integer representation is +** always preferred, even if the affinity is REAL, because +** an integer representation is more space efficient on disk. +** +** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT: +** Convert pRec to a text representation. +** +** SQLITE_AFF_BLOB: +** SQLITE_AFF_NONE: +** No-op. pRec is unchanged. +*/ +static void applyAffinity( + Mem *pRec, /* The value to apply affinity to */ + char affinity, /* The affinity to be applied */ + u8 enc /* Use this text encoding */ +){ + if( affinity>=SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC ){ + assert( affinity==SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER || affinity==SQLITE_AFF_REAL + || affinity==SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC ); + if( (pRec->flags & MEM_Int)==0 ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE*/ + if( (pRec->flags & MEM_Real)==0 ){ + if( pRec->flags & MEM_Str ) applyNumericAffinity(pRec,1); + }else{ + sqlite3VdbeIntegerAffinity(pRec); + } + } + }else if( affinity==SQLITE_AFF_TEXT ){ + /* Only attempt the conversion to TEXT if there is an integer or real + ** representation (blob and NULL do not get converted) but no string + ** representation. It would be harmless to repeat the conversion if + ** there is already a string rep, but it is pointless to waste those + ** CPU cycles. */ + if( 0==(pRec->flags&MEM_Str) ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE*/ + if( (pRec->flags&(MEM_Real|MEM_Int|MEM_IntReal)) ){ + testcase( pRec->flags & MEM_Int ); + testcase( pRec->flags & MEM_Real ); + testcase( pRec->flags & MEM_IntReal ); + sqlite3VdbeMemStringify(pRec, enc, 1); + } + } + pRec->flags &= ~(MEM_Real|MEM_Int|MEM_IntReal); + } +} + +/* +** Try to convert the type of a function argument or a result column +** into a numeric representation. Use either INTEGER or REAL whichever +** is appropriate. But only do the conversion if it is possible without +** loss of information and return the revised type of the argument. +*/ +int sqlite3_value_numeric_type(sqlite3_value *pVal){ + int eType = sqlite3_value_type(pVal); + if( eType==SQLITE_TEXT ){ + Mem *pMem = (Mem*)pVal; + applyNumericAffinity(pMem, 0); + eType = sqlite3_value_type(pVal); + } + return eType; +} + +/* +** Exported version of applyAffinity(). This one works on sqlite3_value*, +** not the internal Mem* type. +*/ +void sqlite3ValueApplyAffinity( + sqlite3_value *pVal, + u8 affinity, + u8 enc +){ + applyAffinity((Mem *)pVal, affinity, enc); +} + +/* +** pMem currently only holds a string type (or maybe a BLOB that we can +** interpret as a string if we want to). Compute its corresponding +** numeric type, if has one. Set the pMem->u.r and pMem->u.i fields +** accordingly. +*/ +static u16 SQLITE_NOINLINE computeNumericType(Mem *pMem){ + int rc; + sqlite3_int64 ix; + assert( (pMem->flags & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real|MEM_IntReal))==0 ); + assert( (pMem->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob))!=0 ); + if( ExpandBlob(pMem) ){ + pMem->u.i = 0; + return MEM_Int; + } + rc = sqlite3AtoF(pMem->z, &pMem->u.r, pMem->n, pMem->enc); + if( rc<=0 ){ + if( rc==0 && sqlite3Atoi64(pMem->z, &ix, pMem->n, pMem->enc)<=1 ){ + pMem->u.i = ix; + return MEM_Int; + }else{ + return MEM_Real; + } + }else if( rc==1 && sqlite3Atoi64(pMem->z, &ix, pMem->n, pMem->enc)==0 ){ + pMem->u.i = ix; + return MEM_Int; + } + return MEM_Real; +} + +/* +** Return the numeric type for pMem, either MEM_Int or MEM_Real or both or +** none. +** +** Unlike applyNumericAffinity(), this routine does not modify pMem->flags. +** But it does set pMem->u.r and pMem->u.i appropriately. +*/ +static u16 numericType(Mem *pMem){ + assert( (pMem->flags & MEM_Null)==0 + || pMem->db==0 || pMem->db->mallocFailed ); + if( pMem->flags & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real|MEM_IntReal|MEM_Null) ){ + testcase( pMem->flags & MEM_Int ); + testcase( pMem->flags & MEM_Real ); + testcase( pMem->flags & MEM_IntReal ); + return pMem->flags & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real|MEM_IntReal|MEM_Null); + } + assert( pMem->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob) ); + testcase( pMem->flags & MEM_Str ); + testcase( pMem->flags & MEM_Blob ); + return computeNumericType(pMem); + return 0; +} + +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG +/* +** Write a nice string representation of the contents of cell pMem +** into buffer zBuf, length nBuf. +*/ +void sqlite3VdbeMemPrettyPrint(Mem *pMem, StrAccum *pStr){ + int f = pMem->flags; + static const char *const encnames[] = {"(X)", "(8)", "(16LE)", "(16BE)"}; + if( f&MEM_Blob ){ + int i; + char c; + if( f & MEM_Dyn ){ + c = 'z'; + assert( (f & (MEM_Static|MEM_Ephem))==0 ); + }else if( f & MEM_Static ){ + c = 't'; + assert( (f & (MEM_Dyn|MEM_Ephem))==0 ); + }else if( f & MEM_Ephem ){ + c = 'e'; + assert( (f & (MEM_Static|MEM_Dyn))==0 ); + }else{ + c = 's'; + } + sqlite3_str_appendf(pStr, "%cx[", c); + for(i=0; i<25 && i<pMem->n; i++){ + sqlite3_str_appendf(pStr, "%02X", ((int)pMem->z[i] & 0xFF)); + } + sqlite3_str_appendf(pStr, "|"); + for(i=0; i<25 && i<pMem->n; i++){ + char z = pMem->z[i]; + sqlite3_str_appendchar(pStr, 1, (z<32||z>126)?'.':z); + } + sqlite3_str_appendf(pStr,"]"); + if( f & MEM_Zero ){ + sqlite3_str_appendf(pStr, "+%dz",pMem->u.nZero); + } + }else if( f & MEM_Str ){ + int j; + u8 c; + if( f & MEM_Dyn ){ + c = 'z'; + assert( (f & (MEM_Static|MEM_Ephem))==0 ); + }else if( f & MEM_Static ){ + c = 't'; + assert( (f & (MEM_Dyn|MEM_Ephem))==0 ); + }else if( f & MEM_Ephem ){ + c = 'e'; + assert( (f & (MEM_Static|MEM_Dyn))==0 ); + }else{ + c = 's'; + } + sqlite3_str_appendf(pStr, " %c%d[", c, pMem->n); + for(j=0; j<25 && j<pMem->n; j++){ + c = pMem->z[j]; + sqlite3_str_appendchar(pStr, 1, (c>=0x20&&c<=0x7f) ? c : '.'); + } + sqlite3_str_appendf(pStr, "]%s", encnames[pMem->enc]); + } +} +#endif + +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG +/* +** Print the value of a register for tracing purposes: +*/ +static void memTracePrint(Mem *p){ + if( p->flags & MEM_Undefined ){ + printf(" undefined"); + }else if( p->flags & MEM_Null ){ + printf(p->flags & MEM_Zero ? " NULL-nochng" : " NULL"); + }else if( (p->flags & (MEM_Int|MEM_Str))==(MEM_Int|MEM_Str) ){ + printf(" si:%lld", p->u.i); + }else if( (p->flags & (MEM_IntReal))!=0 ){ + printf(" ir:%lld", p->u.i); + }else if( p->flags & MEM_Int ){ + printf(" i:%lld", p->u.i); +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT + }else if( p->flags & MEM_Real ){ + printf(" r:%.17g", p->u.r); +#endif + }else if( sqlite3VdbeMemIsRowSet(p) ){ + printf(" (rowset)"); + }else{ + StrAccum acc; + char zBuf[1000]; + sqlite3StrAccumInit(&acc, 0, zBuf, sizeof(zBuf), 0); + sqlite3VdbeMemPrettyPrint(p, &acc); + printf(" %s", sqlite3StrAccumFinish(&acc)); + } + if( p->flags & MEM_Subtype ) printf(" subtype=0x%02x", p->eSubtype); +} +static void registerTrace(int iReg, Mem *p){ + printf("R[%d] = ", iReg); + memTracePrint(p); + if( p->pScopyFrom ){ + printf(" <== R[%d]", (int)(p->pScopyFrom - &p[-iReg])); + } + printf("\n"); + sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(p); +} +/**/ void sqlite3PrintMem(Mem *pMem){ + memTracePrint(pMem); + printf("\n"); + fflush(stdout); +} +#endif + +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG +/* +** Show the values of all registers in the virtual machine. Used for +** interactive debugging. +*/ +void sqlite3VdbeRegisterDump(Vdbe *v){ + int i; + for(i=1; i<v->nMem; i++) registerTrace(i, v->aMem+i); +} +#endif /* SQLITE_DEBUG */ + + +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG +# define REGISTER_TRACE(R,M) if(db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace)registerTrace(R,M) +#else +# define REGISTER_TRACE(R,M) +#endif + + +#ifdef VDBE_PROFILE + +/* +** hwtime.h contains inline assembler code for implementing +** high-performance timing routines. +*/ +#include "hwtime.h" + +#endif + +#ifndef NDEBUG +/* +** This function is only called from within an assert() expression. It +** checks that the sqlite3.nTransaction variable is correctly set to +** the number of non-transaction savepoints currently in the +** linked list starting at sqlite3.pSavepoint. +** +** Usage: +** +** assert( checkSavepointCount(db) ); +*/ +static int checkSavepointCount(sqlite3 *db){ + int n = 0; + Savepoint *p; + for(p=db->pSavepoint; p; p=p->pNext) n++; + assert( n==(db->nSavepoint + db->isTransactionSavepoint) ); + return 1; +} +#endif + +/* +** Return the register of pOp->p2 after first preparing it to be +** overwritten with an integer value. +*/ +static SQLITE_NOINLINE Mem *out2PrereleaseWithClear(Mem *pOut){ + sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut); + pOut->flags = MEM_Int; + return pOut; +} +static Mem *out2Prerelease(Vdbe *p, VdbeOp *pOp){ + Mem *pOut; + assert( pOp->p2>0 ); + assert( pOp->p2<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); + pOut = &p->aMem[pOp->p2]; + memAboutToChange(p, pOut); + if( VdbeMemDynamic(pOut) ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE*/ + return out2PrereleaseWithClear(pOut); + }else{ + pOut->flags = MEM_Int; + return pOut; + } +} + +/* +** Compute a bloom filter hash using pOp->p4.i registers from aMem[] beginning +** with pOp->p3. Return the hash. +*/ +static u64 filterHash(const Mem *aMem, const Op *pOp){ + int i, mx; + u64 h = 0; + + assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 ); + for(i=pOp->p3, mx=i+pOp->p4.i; i<mx; i++){ + const Mem *p = &aMem[i]; + if( p->flags & (MEM_Int|MEM_IntReal) ){ + h += p->u.i; + }else if( p->flags & MEM_Real ){ + h += sqlite3VdbeIntValue(p); + }else if( p->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob) ){ + h += p->n; + if( p->flags & MEM_Zero ) h += p->u.nZero; + } + } + return h; +} + +/* +** Return the symbolic name for the data type of a pMem +*/ +static const char *vdbeMemTypeName(Mem *pMem){ + static const char *azTypes[] = { + /* SQLITE_INTEGER */ "INT", + /* SQLITE_FLOAT */ "REAL", + /* SQLITE_TEXT */ "TEXT", + /* SQLITE_BLOB */ "BLOB", + /* SQLITE_NULL */ "NULL" + }; + return azTypes[sqlite3_value_type(pMem)-1]; +} + +/* +** Execute as much of a VDBE program as we can. +** This is the core of sqlite3_step(). +*/ +int sqlite3VdbeExec( + Vdbe *p /* The VDBE */ +){ + Op *aOp = p->aOp; /* Copy of p->aOp */ + Op *pOp = aOp; /* Current operation */ +#if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) || defined(VDBE_PROFILE) + Op *pOrigOp; /* Value of pOp at the top of the loop */ +#endif +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + int nExtraDelete = 0; /* Verifies FORDELETE and AUXDELETE flags */ +#endif + int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Value to return */ + sqlite3 *db = p->db; /* The database */ + u8 resetSchemaOnFault = 0; /* Reset schema after an error if positive */ + u8 encoding = ENC(db); /* The database encoding */ + int iCompare = 0; /* Result of last comparison */ + u64 nVmStep = 0; /* Number of virtual machine steps */ +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PROGRESS_CALLBACK + u64 nProgressLimit; /* Invoke xProgress() when nVmStep reaches this */ +#endif + Mem *aMem = p->aMem; /* Copy of p->aMem */ + Mem *pIn1 = 0; /* 1st input operand */ + Mem *pIn2 = 0; /* 2nd input operand */ + Mem *pIn3 = 0; /* 3rd input operand */ + Mem *pOut = 0; /* Output operand */ +#ifdef VDBE_PROFILE + u64 start; /* CPU clock count at start of opcode */ +#endif + /*** INSERT STACK UNION HERE ***/ + + assert( p->eVdbeState==VDBE_RUN_STATE ); /* sqlite3_step() verifies this */ + sqlite3VdbeEnter(p); +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PROGRESS_CALLBACK + if( db->xProgress ){ + u32 iPrior = p->aCounter[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_VM_STEP]; + assert( 0 < db->nProgressOps ); + nProgressLimit = db->nProgressOps - (iPrior % db->nProgressOps); + }else{ + nProgressLimit = LARGEST_UINT64; + } +#endif + if( p->rc==SQLITE_NOMEM ){ + /* This happens if a malloc() inside a call to sqlite3_column_text() or + ** sqlite3_column_text16() failed. */ + goto no_mem; + } + assert( p->rc==SQLITE_OK || (p->rc&0xff)==SQLITE_BUSY ); + testcase( p->rc!=SQLITE_OK ); + p->rc = SQLITE_OK; + assert( p->bIsReader || p->readOnly!=0 ); + p->iCurrentTime = 0; + assert( p->explain==0 ); + p->pResultSet = 0; + db->busyHandler.nBusy = 0; + if( AtomicLoad(&db->u1.isInterrupted) ) goto abort_due_to_interrupt; + sqlite3VdbeIOTraceSql(p); +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc(); + if( p->pc==0 + && (p->db->flags & (SQLITE_VdbeListing|SQLITE_VdbeEQP|SQLITE_VdbeTrace))!=0 + ){ + int i; + int once = 1; + sqlite3VdbePrintSql(p); + if( p->db->flags & SQLITE_VdbeListing ){ + printf("VDBE Program Listing:\n"); + for(i=0; i<p->nOp; i++){ + sqlite3VdbePrintOp(stdout, i, &aOp[i]); + } + } + if( p->db->flags & SQLITE_VdbeEQP ){ + for(i=0; i<p->nOp; i++){ + if( aOp[i].opcode==OP_Explain ){ + if( once ) printf("VDBE Query Plan:\n"); + printf("%s\n", aOp[i].p4.z); + once = 0; + } + } + } + if( p->db->flags & SQLITE_VdbeTrace ) printf("VDBE Trace:\n"); + } + sqlite3EndBenignMalloc(); +#endif + for(pOp=&aOp[p->pc]; 1; pOp++){ + /* Errors are detected by individual opcodes, with an immediate + ** jumps to abort_due_to_error. */ + assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); + + assert( pOp>=aOp && pOp<&aOp[p->nOp]); +#ifdef VDBE_PROFILE + start = sqlite3NProfileCnt ? sqlite3NProfileCnt : sqlite3Hwtime(); +#endif + nVmStep++; +#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS + if( p->anExec ) p->anExec[(int)(pOp-aOp)]++; +#endif + + /* Only allow tracing if SQLITE_DEBUG is defined. + */ +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + if( db->flags & SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ + sqlite3VdbePrintOp(stdout, (int)(pOp - aOp), pOp); + test_trace_breakpoint((int)(pOp - aOp),pOp,p); + } +#endif + + + /* Check to see if we need to simulate an interrupt. This only happens + ** if we have a special test build. + */ +#ifdef SQLITE_TEST + if( sqlite3_interrupt_count>0 ){ + sqlite3_interrupt_count--; + if( sqlite3_interrupt_count==0 ){ + sqlite3_interrupt(db); + } + } +#endif + + /* Sanity checking on other operands */ +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + { + u8 opProperty = sqlite3OpcodeProperty[pOp->opcode]; + if( (opProperty & OPFLG_IN1)!=0 ){ + assert( pOp->p1>0 ); + assert( pOp->p1<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); + assert( memIsValid(&aMem[pOp->p1]) ); + assert( sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(&aMem[pOp->p1]) ); + REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p1, &aMem[pOp->p1]); + } + if( (opProperty & OPFLG_IN2)!=0 ){ + assert( pOp->p2>0 ); + assert( pOp->p2<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); + assert( memIsValid(&aMem[pOp->p2]) ); + assert( sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(&aMem[pOp->p2]) ); + REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2, &aMem[pOp->p2]); + } + if( (opProperty & OPFLG_IN3)!=0 ){ + assert( pOp->p3>0 ); + assert( pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); + assert( memIsValid(&aMem[pOp->p3]) ); + assert( sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(&aMem[pOp->p3]) ); + REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, &aMem[pOp->p3]); + } + if( (opProperty & OPFLG_OUT2)!=0 ){ + assert( pOp->p2>0 ); + assert( pOp->p2<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); + memAboutToChange(p, &aMem[pOp->p2]); + } + if( (opProperty & OPFLG_OUT3)!=0 ){ + assert( pOp->p3>0 ); + assert( pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); + memAboutToChange(p, &aMem[pOp->p3]); + } + } +#endif +#if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) || defined(VDBE_PROFILE) + pOrigOp = pOp; +#endif + + switch( pOp->opcode ){ + +/***************************************************************************** +** What follows is a massive switch statement where each case implements a +** separate instruction in the virtual machine. If we follow the usual +** indentation conventions, each case should be indented by 6 spaces. But +** that is a lot of wasted space on the left margin. So the code within +** the switch statement will break with convention and be flush-left. Another +** big comment (similar to this one) will mark the point in the code where +** we transition back to normal indentation. +** +** The formatting of each case is important. The makefile for SQLite +** generates two C files "opcodes.h" and "opcodes.c" by scanning this +** file looking for lines that begin with "case OP_". The opcodes.h files +** will be filled with #defines that give unique integer values to each +** opcode and the opcodes.c file is filled with an array of strings where +** each string is the symbolic name for the corresponding opcode. If the +** case statement is followed by a comment of the form "/# same as ... #/" +** that comment is used to determine the particular value of the opcode. +** +** Other keywords in the comment that follows each case are used to +** construct the OPFLG_INITIALIZER value that initializes opcodeProperty[]. +** Keywords include: in1, in2, in3, out2, out3. See +** the mkopcodeh.awk script for additional information. +** +** Documentation about VDBE opcodes is generated by scanning this file +** for lines of that contain "Opcode:". That line and all subsequent +** comment lines are used in the generation of the opcode.html documentation +** file. +** +** SUMMARY: +** +** Formatting is important to scripts that scan this file. +** Do not deviate from the formatting style currently in use. +** +*****************************************************************************/ + +/* Opcode: Goto * P2 * * * +** +** An unconditional jump to address P2. +** The next instruction executed will be +** the one at index P2 from the beginning of +** the program. +** +** The P1 parameter is not actually used by this opcode. However, it +** is sometimes set to 1 instead of 0 as a hint to the command-line shell +** that this Goto is the bottom of a loop and that the lines from P2 down +** to the current line should be indented for EXPLAIN output. +*/ +case OP_Goto: { /* jump */ + +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + /* In debuggging mode, when the p5 flags is set on an OP_Goto, that + ** means we should really jump back to the preceeding OP_ReleaseReg + ** instruction. */ + if( pOp->p5 ){ + assert( pOp->p2 < (int)(pOp - aOp) ); + assert( pOp->p2 > 1 ); + pOp = &aOp[pOp->p2 - 2]; + assert( pOp[1].opcode==OP_ReleaseReg ); + goto check_for_interrupt; + } +#endif + +jump_to_p2_and_check_for_interrupt: + pOp = &aOp[pOp->p2 - 1]; + + /* Opcodes that are used as the bottom of a loop (OP_Next, OP_Prev, + ** OP_VNext, or OP_SorterNext) all jump here upon + ** completion. Check to see if sqlite3_interrupt() has been called + ** or if the progress callback needs to be invoked. + ** + ** This code uses unstructured "goto" statements and does not look clean. + ** But that is not due to sloppy coding habits. The code is written this + ** way for performance, to avoid having to run the interrupt and progress + ** checks on every opcode. This helps sqlite3_step() to run about 1.5% + ** faster according to "valgrind --tool=cachegrind" */ +check_for_interrupt: + if( AtomicLoad(&db->u1.isInterrupted) ) goto abort_due_to_interrupt; +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PROGRESS_CALLBACK + /* Call the progress callback if it is configured and the required number + ** of VDBE ops have been executed (either since this invocation of + ** sqlite3VdbeExec() or since last time the progress callback was called). + ** If the progress callback returns non-zero, exit the virtual machine with + ** a return code SQLITE_ABORT. + */ + while( nVmStep>=nProgressLimit && db->xProgress!=0 ){ + assert( db->nProgressOps!=0 ); + nProgressLimit += db->nProgressOps; + if( db->xProgress(db->pProgressArg) ){ + nProgressLimit = LARGEST_UINT64; + rc = SQLITE_INTERRUPT; + goto abort_due_to_error; + } + } +#endif + + break; +} + +/* Opcode: Gosub P1 P2 * * * +** +** Write the current address onto register P1 +** and then jump to address P2. +*/ +case OP_Gosub: { /* jump */ + assert( pOp->p1>0 && pOp->p1<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + assert( VdbeMemDynamic(pIn1)==0 ); + memAboutToChange(p, pIn1); + pIn1->flags = MEM_Int; + pIn1->u.i = (int)(pOp-aOp); + REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p1, pIn1); + goto jump_to_p2_and_check_for_interrupt; +} + +/* Opcode: Return P1 P2 P3 * * +** +** Jump to the address stored in register P1. If P1 is a return address +** register, then this accomplishes a return from a subroutine. +** +** If P3 is 1, then the jump is only taken if register P1 holds an integer +** values, otherwise execution falls through to the next opcode, and the +** OP_Return becomes a no-op. If P3 is 0, then register P1 must hold an +** integer or else an assert() is raised. P3 should be set to 1 when +** this opcode is used in combination with OP_BeginSubrtn, and set to 0 +** otherwise. +** +** The value in register P1 is unchanged by this opcode. +** +** P2 is not used by the byte-code engine. However, if P2 is positive +** and also less than the current address, then the "EXPLAIN" output +** formatter in the CLI will indent all opcodes from the P2 opcode up +** to be not including the current Return. P2 should be the first opcode +** in the subroutine from which this opcode is returning. Thus the P2 +** value is a byte-code indentation hint. See tag-20220407a in +** wherecode.c and shell.c. +*/ +case OP_Return: { /* in1 */ + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + if( pIn1->flags & MEM_Int ){ + if( pOp->p3 ){ VdbeBranchTaken(1, 2); } + pOp = &aOp[pIn1->u.i]; + }else if( ALWAYS(pOp->p3) ){ + VdbeBranchTaken(0, 2); + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: InitCoroutine P1 P2 P3 * * +** +** Set up register P1 so that it will Yield to the coroutine +** located at address P3. +** +** If P2!=0 then the coroutine implementation immediately follows +** this opcode. So jump over the coroutine implementation to +** address P2. +** +** See also: EndCoroutine +*/ +case OP_InitCoroutine: { /* jump */ + assert( pOp->p1>0 && pOp->p1<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); + assert( pOp->p2>=0 && pOp->p2<p->nOp ); + assert( pOp->p3>=0 && pOp->p3<p->nOp ); + pOut = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + assert( !VdbeMemDynamic(pOut) ); + pOut->u.i = pOp->p3 - 1; + pOut->flags = MEM_Int; + if( pOp->p2==0 ) break; + + /* Most jump operations do a goto to this spot in order to update + ** the pOp pointer. */ +jump_to_p2: + assert( pOp->p2>0 ); /* There are never any jumps to instruction 0 */ + assert( pOp->p2<p->nOp ); /* Jumps must be in range */ + pOp = &aOp[pOp->p2 - 1]; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: EndCoroutine P1 * * * * +** +** The instruction at the address in register P1 is a Yield. +** Jump to the P2 parameter of that Yield. +** After the jump, register P1 becomes undefined. +** +** See also: InitCoroutine +*/ +case OP_EndCoroutine: { /* in1 */ + VdbeOp *pCaller; + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + assert( pIn1->flags==MEM_Int ); + assert( pIn1->u.i>=0 && pIn1->u.i<p->nOp ); + pCaller = &aOp[pIn1->u.i]; + assert( pCaller->opcode==OP_Yield ); + assert( pCaller->p2>=0 && pCaller->p2<p->nOp ); + pOp = &aOp[pCaller->p2 - 1]; + pIn1->flags = MEM_Undefined; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: Yield P1 P2 * * * +** +** Swap the program counter with the value in register P1. This +** has the effect of yielding to a coroutine. +** +** If the coroutine that is launched by this instruction ends with +** Yield or Return then continue to the next instruction. But if +** the coroutine launched by this instruction ends with +** EndCoroutine, then jump to P2 rather than continuing with the +** next instruction. +** +** See also: InitCoroutine +*/ +case OP_Yield: { /* in1, jump */ + int pcDest; + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + assert( VdbeMemDynamic(pIn1)==0 ); + pIn1->flags = MEM_Int; + pcDest = (int)pIn1->u.i; + pIn1->u.i = (int)(pOp - aOp); + REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p1, pIn1); + pOp = &aOp[pcDest]; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: HaltIfNull P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 +** Synopsis: if r[P3]=null halt +** +** Check the value in register P3. If it is NULL then Halt using +** parameter P1, P2, and P4 as if this were a Halt instruction. If the +** value in register P3 is not NULL, then this routine is a no-op. +** The P5 parameter should be 1. +*/ +case OP_HaltIfNull: { /* in3 */ + pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + if( pOp->p2==OE_Abort ){ sqlite3VdbeAssertAbortable(p); } +#endif + if( (pIn3->flags & MEM_Null)==0 ) break; + /* Fall through into OP_Halt */ + /* no break */ deliberate_fall_through +} + +/* Opcode: Halt P1 P2 * P4 P5 +** +** Exit immediately. All open cursors, etc are closed +** automatically. +** +** P1 is the result code returned by sqlite3_exec(), sqlite3_reset(), +** or sqlite3_finalize(). For a normal halt, this should be SQLITE_OK (0). +** For errors, it can be some other value. If P1!=0 then P2 will determine +** whether or not to rollback the current transaction. Do not rollback +** if P2==OE_Fail. Do the rollback if P2==OE_Rollback. If P2==OE_Abort, +** then back out all changes that have occurred during this execution of the +** VDBE, but do not rollback the transaction. +** +** If P4 is not null then it is an error message string. +** +** P5 is a value between 0 and 4, inclusive, that modifies the P4 string. +** +** 0: (no change) +** 1: NOT NULL contraint failed: P4 +** 2: UNIQUE constraint failed: P4 +** 3: CHECK constraint failed: P4 +** 4: FOREIGN KEY constraint failed: P4 +** +** If P5 is not zero and P4 is NULL, then everything after the ":" is +** omitted. +** +** There is an implied "Halt 0 0 0" instruction inserted at the very end of +** every program. So a jump past the last instruction of the program +** is the same as executing Halt. +*/ +case OP_Halt: { + VdbeFrame *pFrame; + int pcx; + +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + if( pOp->p2==OE_Abort ){ sqlite3VdbeAssertAbortable(p); } +#endif + if( p->pFrame && pOp->p1==SQLITE_OK ){ + /* Halt the sub-program. Return control to the parent frame. */ + pFrame = p->pFrame; + p->pFrame = pFrame->pParent; + p->nFrame--; + sqlite3VdbeSetChanges(db, p->nChange); + pcx = sqlite3VdbeFrameRestore(pFrame); + if( pOp->p2==OE_Ignore ){ + /* Instruction pcx is the OP_Program that invoked the sub-program + ** currently being halted. If the p2 instruction of this OP_Halt + ** instruction is set to OE_Ignore, then the sub-program is throwing + ** an IGNORE exception. In this case jump to the address specified + ** as the p2 of the calling OP_Program. */ + pcx = p->aOp[pcx].p2-1; + } + aOp = p->aOp; + aMem = p->aMem; + pOp = &aOp[pcx]; + break; + } + p->rc = pOp->p1; + p->errorAction = (u8)pOp->p2; + assert( pOp->p5<=4 ); + if( p->rc ){ + if( pOp->p5 ){ + static const char * const azType[] = { "NOT NULL", "UNIQUE", "CHECK", + "FOREIGN KEY" }; + testcase( pOp->p5==1 ); + testcase( pOp->p5==2 ); + testcase( pOp->p5==3 ); + testcase( pOp->p5==4 ); + sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s constraint failed", azType[pOp->p5-1]); + if( pOp->p4.z ){ + p->zErrMsg = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "%z: %s", p->zErrMsg, pOp->p4.z); + } + }else{ + sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", pOp->p4.z); + } + pcx = (int)(pOp - aOp); + sqlite3_log(pOp->p1, "abort at %d in [%s]: %s", pcx, p->zSql, p->zErrMsg); + } + rc = sqlite3VdbeHalt(p); + assert( rc==SQLITE_BUSY || rc==SQLITE_OK || rc==SQLITE_ERROR ); + if( rc==SQLITE_BUSY ){ + p->rc = SQLITE_BUSY; + }else{ + assert( rc==SQLITE_OK || (p->rc&0xff)==SQLITE_CONSTRAINT ); + assert( rc==SQLITE_OK || db->nDeferredCons>0 || db->nDeferredImmCons>0 ); + rc = p->rc ? SQLITE_ERROR : SQLITE_DONE; + } + goto vdbe_return; +} + +/* Opcode: Integer P1 P2 * * * +** Synopsis: r[P2]=P1 +** +** The 32-bit integer value P1 is written into register P2. +*/ +case OP_Integer: { /* out2 */ + pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); + pOut->u.i = pOp->p1; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: Int64 * P2 * P4 * +** Synopsis: r[P2]=P4 +** +** P4 is a pointer to a 64-bit integer value. +** Write that value into register P2. +*/ +case OP_Int64: { /* out2 */ + pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); + assert( pOp->p4.pI64!=0 ); + pOut->u.i = *pOp->p4.pI64; + break; +} + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT +/* Opcode: Real * P2 * P4 * +** Synopsis: r[P2]=P4 +** +** P4 is a pointer to a 64-bit floating point value. +** Write that value into register P2. +*/ +case OP_Real: { /* same as TK_FLOAT, out2 */ + pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); + pOut->flags = MEM_Real; + assert( !sqlite3IsNaN(*pOp->p4.pReal) ); + pOut->u.r = *pOp->p4.pReal; + break; +} +#endif + +/* Opcode: String8 * P2 * P4 * +** Synopsis: r[P2]='P4' +** +** P4 points to a nul terminated UTF-8 string. This opcode is transformed +** into a String opcode before it is executed for the first time. During +** this transformation, the length of string P4 is computed and stored +** as the P1 parameter. +*/ +case OP_String8: { /* same as TK_STRING, out2 */ + assert( pOp->p4.z!=0 ); + pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); + pOp->p1 = sqlite3Strlen30(pOp->p4.z); + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16 + if( encoding!=SQLITE_UTF8 ){ + rc = sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pOut, pOp->p4.z, -1, SQLITE_UTF8, SQLITE_STATIC); + assert( rc==SQLITE_OK || rc==SQLITE_TOOBIG ); + if( rc ) goto too_big; + if( SQLITE_OK!=sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pOut, encoding) ) goto no_mem; + assert( pOut->szMalloc>0 && pOut->zMalloc==pOut->z ); + assert( VdbeMemDynamic(pOut)==0 ); + pOut->szMalloc = 0; + pOut->flags |= MEM_Static; + if( pOp->p4type==P4_DYNAMIC ){ + sqlite3DbFree(db, pOp->p4.z); + } + pOp->p4type = P4_DYNAMIC; + pOp->p4.z = pOut->z; + pOp->p1 = pOut->n; + } +#endif + if( pOp->p1>db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH] ){ + goto too_big; + } + pOp->opcode = OP_String; + assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); + /* Fall through to the next case, OP_String */ + /* no break */ deliberate_fall_through +} + +/* Opcode: String P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 +** Synopsis: r[P2]='P4' (len=P1) +** +** The string value P4 of length P1 (bytes) is stored in register P2. +** +** If P3 is not zero and the content of register P3 is equal to P5, then +** the datatype of the register P2 is converted to BLOB. The content is +** the same sequence of bytes, it is merely interpreted as a BLOB instead +** of a string, as if it had been CAST. In other words: +** +** if( P3!=0 and reg[P3]==P5 ) reg[P2] := CAST(reg[P2] as BLOB) +*/ +case OP_String: { /* out2 */ + assert( pOp->p4.z!=0 ); + pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); + pOut->flags = MEM_Str|MEM_Static|MEM_Term; + pOut->z = pOp->p4.z; + pOut->n = pOp->p1; + pOut->enc = encoding; + UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pOut); +#ifndef SQLITE_LIKE_DOESNT_MATCH_BLOBS + if( pOp->p3>0 ){ + assert( pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); + pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + assert( pIn3->flags & MEM_Int ); + if( pIn3->u.i==pOp->p5 ) pOut->flags = MEM_Blob|MEM_Static|MEM_Term; + } +#endif + break; +} + +/* Opcode: BeginSubrtn * P2 * * * +** Synopsis: r[P2]=NULL +** +** Mark the beginning of a subroutine that can be entered in-line +** or that can be called using OP_Gosub. The subroutine should +** be terminated by an OP_Return instruction that has a P1 operand that +** is the same as the P2 operand to this opcode and that has P3 set to 1. +** If the subroutine is entered in-line, then the OP_Return will simply +** fall through. But if the subroutine is entered using OP_Gosub, then +** the OP_Return will jump back to the first instruction after the OP_Gosub. +** +** This routine works by loading a NULL into the P2 register. When the +** return address register contains a NULL, the OP_Return instruction is +** a no-op that simply falls through to the next instruction (assuming that +** the OP_Return opcode has a P3 value of 1). Thus if the subroutine is +** entered in-line, then the OP_Return will cause in-line execution to +** continue. But if the subroutine is entered via OP_Gosub, then the +** OP_Return will cause a return to the address following the OP_Gosub. +** +** This opcode is identical to OP_Null. It has a different name +** only to make the byte code easier to read and verify. +*/ +/* Opcode: Null P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: r[P2..P3]=NULL +** +** Write a NULL into registers P2. If P3 greater than P2, then also write +** NULL into register P3 and every register in between P2 and P3. If P3 +** is less than P2 (typically P3 is zero) then only register P2 is +** set to NULL. +** +** If the P1 value is non-zero, then also set the MEM_Cleared flag so that +** NULL values will not compare equal even if SQLITE_NULLEQ is set on +** OP_Ne or OP_Eq. +*/ +case OP_BeginSubrtn: +case OP_Null: { /* out2 */ + int cnt; + u16 nullFlag; + pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); + cnt = pOp->p3-pOp->p2; + assert( pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); + pOut->flags = nullFlag = pOp->p1 ? (MEM_Null|MEM_Cleared) : MEM_Null; + pOut->n = 0; +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + pOut->uTemp = 0; +#endif + while( cnt>0 ){ + pOut++; + memAboutToChange(p, pOut); + sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut); + pOut->flags = nullFlag; + pOut->n = 0; + cnt--; + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: SoftNull P1 * * * * +** Synopsis: r[P1]=NULL +** +** Set register P1 to have the value NULL as seen by the OP_MakeRecord +** instruction, but do not free any string or blob memory associated with +** the register, so that if the value was a string or blob that was +** previously copied using OP_SCopy, the copies will continue to be valid. +*/ +case OP_SoftNull: { + assert( pOp->p1>0 && pOp->p1<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); + pOut = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + pOut->flags = (pOut->flags&~(MEM_Undefined|MEM_AffMask))|MEM_Null; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: Blob P1 P2 * P4 * +** Synopsis: r[P2]=P4 (len=P1) +** +** P4 points to a blob of data P1 bytes long. Store this +** blob in register P2. If P4 is a NULL pointer, then construct +** a zero-filled blob that is P1 bytes long in P2. +*/ +case OP_Blob: { /* out2 */ + assert( pOp->p1 <= SQLITE_MAX_LENGTH ); + pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); + if( pOp->p4.z==0 ){ + sqlite3VdbeMemSetZeroBlob(pOut, pOp->p1); + if( sqlite3VdbeMemExpandBlob(pOut) ) goto no_mem; + }else{ + sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pOut, pOp->p4.z, pOp->p1, 0, 0); + } + pOut->enc = encoding; + UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pOut); + break; +} + +/* Opcode: Variable P1 P2 * P4 * +** Synopsis: r[P2]=parameter(P1,P4) +** +** Transfer the values of bound parameter P1 into register P2 +** +** If the parameter is named, then its name appears in P4. +** The P4 value is used by sqlite3_bind_parameter_name(). +*/ +case OP_Variable: { /* out2 */ + Mem *pVar; /* Value being transferred */ + + assert( pOp->p1>0 && pOp->p1<=p->nVar ); + assert( pOp->p4.z==0 || pOp->p4.z==sqlite3VListNumToName(p->pVList,pOp->p1) ); + pVar = &p->aVar[pOp->p1 - 1]; + if( sqlite3VdbeMemTooBig(pVar) ){ + goto too_big; + } + pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2]; + if( VdbeMemDynamic(pOut) ) sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut); + memcpy(pOut, pVar, MEMCELLSIZE); + pOut->flags &= ~(MEM_Dyn|MEM_Ephem); + pOut->flags |= MEM_Static|MEM_FromBind; + UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pOut); + break; +} + +/* Opcode: Move P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: r[P2@P3]=r[P1@P3] +** +** Move the P3 values in register P1..P1+P3-1 over into +** registers P2..P2+P3-1. Registers P1..P1+P3-1 are +** left holding a NULL. It is an error for register ranges +** P1..P1+P3-1 and P2..P2+P3-1 to overlap. It is an error +** for P3 to be less than 1. +*/ +case OP_Move: { + int n; /* Number of registers left to copy */ + int p1; /* Register to copy from */ + int p2; /* Register to copy to */ + + n = pOp->p3; + p1 = pOp->p1; + p2 = pOp->p2; + assert( n>0 && p1>0 && p2>0 ); + assert( p1+n<=p2 || p2+n<=p1 ); + + pIn1 = &aMem[p1]; + pOut = &aMem[p2]; + do{ + assert( pOut<=&aMem[(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)] ); + assert( pIn1<=&aMem[(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)] ); + assert( memIsValid(pIn1) ); + memAboutToChange(p, pOut); + sqlite3VdbeMemMove(pOut, pIn1); +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + pIn1->pScopyFrom = 0; + { int i; + for(i=1; i<p->nMem; i++){ + if( aMem[i].pScopyFrom==pIn1 ){ + aMem[i].pScopyFrom = pOut; + } + } + } +#endif + Deephemeralize(pOut); + REGISTER_TRACE(p2++, pOut); + pIn1++; + pOut++; + }while( --n ); + break; +} + +/* Opcode: Copy P1 P2 P3 * P5 +** Synopsis: r[P2@P3+1]=r[P1@P3+1] +** +** Make a copy of registers P1..P1+P3 into registers P2..P2+P3. +** +** If the 0x0002 bit of P5 is set then also clear the MEM_Subtype flag in the +** destination. The 0x0001 bit of P5 indicates that this Copy opcode cannot +** be merged. The 0x0001 bit is used by the query planner and does not +** come into play during query execution. +** +** This instruction makes a deep copy of the value. A duplicate +** is made of any string or blob constant. See also OP_SCopy. +*/ +case OP_Copy: { + int n; + + n = pOp->p3; + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2]; + assert( pOut!=pIn1 ); + while( 1 ){ + memAboutToChange(p, pOut); + sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pOut, pIn1, MEM_Ephem); + Deephemeralize(pOut); + if( (pOut->flags & MEM_Subtype)!=0 && (pOp->p5 & 0x0002)!=0 ){ + pOut->flags &= ~MEM_Subtype; + } +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + pOut->pScopyFrom = 0; +#endif + REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2+pOp->p3-n, pOut); + if( (n--)==0 ) break; + pOut++; + pIn1++; + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: SCopy P1 P2 * * * +** Synopsis: r[P2]=r[P1] +** +** Make a shallow copy of register P1 into register P2. +** +** This instruction makes a shallow copy of the value. If the value +** is a string or blob, then the copy is only a pointer to the +** original and hence if the original changes so will the copy. +** Worse, if the original is deallocated, the copy becomes invalid. +** Thus the program must guarantee that the original will not change +** during the lifetime of the copy. Use OP_Copy to make a complete +** copy. +*/ +case OP_SCopy: { /* out2 */ + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2]; + assert( pOut!=pIn1 ); + sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pOut, pIn1, MEM_Ephem); +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + pOut->pScopyFrom = pIn1; + pOut->mScopyFlags = pIn1->flags; +#endif + break; +} + +/* Opcode: IntCopy P1 P2 * * * +** Synopsis: r[P2]=r[P1] +** +** Transfer the integer value held in register P1 into register P2. +** +** This is an optimized version of SCopy that works only for integer +** values. +*/ +case OP_IntCopy: { /* out2 */ + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + assert( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Int)!=0 ); + pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2]; + sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pOut, pIn1->u.i); + break; +} + +/* Opcode: FkCheck * * * * * +** +** Halt with an SQLITE_CONSTRAINT error if there are any unresolved +** foreign key constraint violations. If there are no foreign key +** constraint violations, this is a no-op. +** +** FK constraint violations are also checked when the prepared statement +** exits. This opcode is used to raise foreign key constraint errors prior +** to returning results such as a row change count or the result of a +** RETURNING clause. +*/ +case OP_FkCheck: { + if( (rc = sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p,0))!=SQLITE_OK ){ + goto abort_due_to_error; + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: ResultRow P1 P2 * * * +** Synopsis: output=r[P1@P2] +** +** The registers P1 through P1+P2-1 contain a single row of +** results. This opcode causes the sqlite3_step() call to terminate +** with an SQLITE_ROW return code and it sets up the sqlite3_stmt +** structure to provide access to the r(P1)..r(P1+P2-1) values as +** the result row. +*/ +case OP_ResultRow: { + assert( p->nResColumn==pOp->p2 ); + assert( pOp->p1>0 || CORRUPT_DB ); + assert( pOp->p1+pOp->p2<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1 ); + + p->cacheCtr = (p->cacheCtr + 2)|1; + p->pResultSet = &aMem[pOp->p1]; +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + { + Mem *pMem = p->pResultSet; + int i; + for(i=0; i<pOp->p2; i++){ + assert( memIsValid(&pMem[i]) ); + REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p1+i, &pMem[i]); + /* The registers in the result will not be used again when the + ** prepared statement restarts. This is because sqlite3_column() + ** APIs might have caused type conversions of made other changes to + ** the register values. Therefore, we can go ahead and break any + ** OP_SCopy dependencies. */ + pMem[i].pScopyFrom = 0; + } + } +#endif + if( db->mallocFailed ) goto no_mem; + if( db->mTrace & SQLITE_TRACE_ROW ){ + db->trace.xV2(SQLITE_TRACE_ROW, db->pTraceArg, p, 0); + } + p->pc = (int)(pOp - aOp) + 1; + rc = SQLITE_ROW; + goto vdbe_return; +} + +/* Opcode: Concat P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]+r[P1] +** +** Add the text in register P1 onto the end of the text in +** register P2 and store the result in register P3. +** If either the P1 or P2 text are NULL then store NULL in P3. +** +** P3 = P2 || P1 +** +** It is illegal for P1 and P3 to be the same register. Sometimes, +** if P3 is the same register as P2, the implementation is able +** to avoid a memcpy(). +*/ +case OP_Concat: { /* same as TK_CONCAT, in1, in2, out3 */ + i64 nByte; /* Total size of the output string or blob */ + u16 flags1; /* Initial flags for P1 */ + u16 flags2; /* Initial flags for P2 */ + + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2]; + pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + testcase( pOut==pIn2 ); + assert( pIn1!=pOut ); + flags1 = pIn1->flags; + testcase( flags1 & MEM_Null ); + testcase( pIn2->flags & MEM_Null ); + if( (flags1 | pIn2->flags) & MEM_Null ){ + sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut); + break; + } + if( (flags1 & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob))==0 ){ + if( sqlite3VdbeMemStringify(pIn1,encoding,0) ) goto no_mem; + flags1 = pIn1->flags & ~MEM_Str; + }else if( (flags1 & MEM_Zero)!=0 ){ + if( sqlite3VdbeMemExpandBlob(pIn1) ) goto no_mem; + flags1 = pIn1->flags & ~MEM_Str; + } + flags2 = pIn2->flags; + if( (flags2 & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob))==0 ){ + if( sqlite3VdbeMemStringify(pIn2,encoding,0) ) goto no_mem; + flags2 = pIn2->flags & ~MEM_Str; + }else if( (flags2 & MEM_Zero)!=0 ){ + if( sqlite3VdbeMemExpandBlob(pIn2) ) goto no_mem; + flags2 = pIn2->flags & ~MEM_Str; + } + nByte = pIn1->n + pIn2->n; + if( nByte>db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH] ){ + goto too_big; + } + if( sqlite3VdbeMemGrow(pOut, (int)nByte+2, pOut==pIn2) ){ + goto no_mem; + } + MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Str); + if( pOut!=pIn2 ){ + memcpy(pOut->z, pIn2->z, pIn2->n); + assert( (pIn2->flags & MEM_Dyn) == (flags2 & MEM_Dyn) ); + pIn2->flags = flags2; + } + memcpy(&pOut->z[pIn2->n], pIn1->z, pIn1->n); + assert( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Dyn) == (flags1 & MEM_Dyn) ); + pIn1->flags = flags1; + if( encoding>SQLITE_UTF8 ) nByte &= ~1; + pOut->z[nByte]=0; + pOut->z[nByte+1] = 0; + pOut->flags |= MEM_Term; + pOut->n = (int)nByte; + pOut->enc = encoding; + UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pOut); + break; +} + +/* Opcode: Add P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P1]+r[P2] +** +** Add the value in register P1 to the value in register P2 +** and store the result in register P3. +** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL. +*/ +/* Opcode: Multiply P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P1]*r[P2] +** +** +** Multiply the value in register P1 by the value in register P2 +** and store the result in register P3. +** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL. +*/ +/* Opcode: Subtract P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]-r[P1] +** +** Subtract the value in register P1 from the value in register P2 +** and store the result in register P3. +** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL. +*/ +/* Opcode: Divide P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]/r[P1] +** +** Divide the value in register P1 by the value in register P2 +** and store the result in register P3 (P3=P2/P1). If the value in +** register P1 is zero, then the result is NULL. If either input is +** NULL, the result is NULL. +*/ +/* Opcode: Remainder P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]%r[P1] +** +** Compute the remainder after integer register P2 is divided by +** register P1 and store the result in register P3. +** If the value in register P1 is zero the result is NULL. +** If either operand is NULL, the result is NULL. +*/ +case OP_Add: /* same as TK_PLUS, in1, in2, out3 */ +case OP_Subtract: /* same as TK_MINUS, in1, in2, out3 */ +case OP_Multiply: /* same as TK_STAR, in1, in2, out3 */ +case OP_Divide: /* same as TK_SLASH, in1, in2, out3 */ +case OP_Remainder: { /* same as TK_REM, in1, in2, out3 */ + u16 type1; /* Numeric type of left operand */ + u16 type2; /* Numeric type of right operand */ + i64 iA; /* Integer value of left operand */ + i64 iB; /* Integer value of right operand */ + double rA; /* Real value of left operand */ + double rB; /* Real value of right operand */ + + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + type1 = pIn1->flags; + pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2]; + type2 = pIn2->flags; + pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + if( (type1 & type2 & MEM_Int)!=0 ){ +int_math: + iA = pIn1->u.i; + iB = pIn2->u.i; + switch( pOp->opcode ){ + case OP_Add: if( sqlite3AddInt64(&iB,iA) ) goto fp_math; break; + case OP_Subtract: if( sqlite3SubInt64(&iB,iA) ) goto fp_math; break; + case OP_Multiply: if( sqlite3MulInt64(&iB,iA) ) goto fp_math; break; + case OP_Divide: { + if( iA==0 ) goto arithmetic_result_is_null; + if( iA==-1 && iB==SMALLEST_INT64 ) goto fp_math; + iB /= iA; + break; + } + default: { + if( iA==0 ) goto arithmetic_result_is_null; + if( iA==-1 ) iA = 1; + iB %= iA; + break; + } + } + pOut->u.i = iB; + MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Int); + }else if( ((type1 | type2) & MEM_Null)!=0 ){ + goto arithmetic_result_is_null; + }else{ + type1 = numericType(pIn1); + type2 = numericType(pIn2); + if( (type1 & type2 & MEM_Int)!=0 ) goto int_math; +fp_math: + rA = sqlite3VdbeRealValue(pIn1); + rB = sqlite3VdbeRealValue(pIn2); + switch( pOp->opcode ){ + case OP_Add: rB += rA; break; + case OP_Subtract: rB -= rA; break; + case OP_Multiply: rB *= rA; break; + case OP_Divide: { + /* (double)0 In case of SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT... */ + if( rA==(double)0 ) goto arithmetic_result_is_null; + rB /= rA; + break; + } + default: { + iA = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn1); + iB = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn2); + if( iA==0 ) goto arithmetic_result_is_null; + if( iA==-1 ) iA = 1; + rB = (double)(iB % iA); + break; + } + } +#ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT + pOut->u.i = rB; + MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Int); +#else + if( sqlite3IsNaN(rB) ){ + goto arithmetic_result_is_null; + } + pOut->u.r = rB; + MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Real); +#endif + } + break; + +arithmetic_result_is_null: + sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut); + break; +} + +/* Opcode: CollSeq P1 * * P4 +** +** P4 is a pointer to a CollSeq object. If the next call to a user function +** or aggregate calls sqlite3GetFuncCollSeq(), this collation sequence will +** be returned. This is used by the built-in min(), max() and nullif() +** functions. +** +** If P1 is not zero, then it is a register that a subsequent min() or +** max() aggregate will set to 1 if the current row is not the minimum or +** maximum. The P1 register is initialized to 0 by this instruction. +** +** The interface used by the implementation of the aforementioned functions +** to retrieve the collation sequence set by this opcode is not available +** publicly. Only built-in functions have access to this feature. +*/ +case OP_CollSeq: { + assert( pOp->p4type==P4_COLLSEQ ); + if( pOp->p1 ){ + sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(&aMem[pOp->p1], 0); + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: BitAnd P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P1]&r[P2] +** +** Take the bit-wise AND of the values in register P1 and P2 and +** store the result in register P3. +** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL. +*/ +/* Opcode: BitOr P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P1]|r[P2] +** +** Take the bit-wise OR of the values in register P1 and P2 and +** store the result in register P3. +** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL. +*/ +/* Opcode: ShiftLeft P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]<<r[P1] +** +** Shift the integer value in register P2 to the left by the +** number of bits specified by the integer in register P1. +** Store the result in register P3. +** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL. +*/ +/* Opcode: ShiftRight P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]>>r[P1] +** +** Shift the integer value in register P2 to the right by the +** number of bits specified by the integer in register P1. +** Store the result in register P3. +** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL. +*/ +case OP_BitAnd: /* same as TK_BITAND, in1, in2, out3 */ +case OP_BitOr: /* same as TK_BITOR, in1, in2, out3 */ +case OP_ShiftLeft: /* same as TK_LSHIFT, in1, in2, out3 */ +case OP_ShiftRight: { /* same as TK_RSHIFT, in1, in2, out3 */ + i64 iA; + u64 uA; + i64 iB; + u8 op; + + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2]; + pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + if( (pIn1->flags | pIn2->flags) & MEM_Null ){ + sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut); + break; + } + iA = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn2); + iB = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn1); + op = pOp->opcode; + if( op==OP_BitAnd ){ + iA &= iB; + }else if( op==OP_BitOr ){ + iA |= iB; + }else if( iB!=0 ){ + assert( op==OP_ShiftRight || op==OP_ShiftLeft ); + + /* If shifting by a negative amount, shift in the other direction */ + if( iB<0 ){ + assert( OP_ShiftRight==OP_ShiftLeft+1 ); + op = 2*OP_ShiftLeft + 1 - op; + iB = iB>(-64) ? -iB : 64; + } + + if( iB>=64 ){ + iA = (iA>=0 || op==OP_ShiftLeft) ? 0 : -1; + }else{ + memcpy(&uA, &iA, sizeof(uA)); + if( op==OP_ShiftLeft ){ + uA <<= iB; + }else{ + uA >>= iB; + /* Sign-extend on a right shift of a negative number */ + if( iA<0 ) uA |= ((((u64)0xffffffff)<<32)|0xffffffff) << (64-iB); + } + memcpy(&iA, &uA, sizeof(iA)); + } + } + pOut->u.i = iA; + MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Int); + break; +} + +/* Opcode: AddImm P1 P2 * * * +** Synopsis: r[P1]=r[P1]+P2 +** +** Add the constant P2 to the value in register P1. +** The result is always an integer. +** +** To force any register to be an integer, just add 0. +*/ +case OP_AddImm: { /* in1 */ + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + memAboutToChange(p, pIn1); + sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pIn1); + pIn1->u.i += pOp->p2; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: MustBeInt P1 P2 * * * +** +** Force the value in register P1 to be an integer. If the value +** in P1 is not an integer and cannot be converted into an integer +** without data loss, then jump immediately to P2, or if P2==0 +** raise an SQLITE_MISMATCH exception. +*/ +case OP_MustBeInt: { /* jump, in1 */ + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Int)==0 ){ + applyAffinity(pIn1, SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC, encoding); + if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Int)==0 ){ + VdbeBranchTaken(1, 2); + if( pOp->p2==0 ){ + rc = SQLITE_MISMATCH; + goto abort_due_to_error; + }else{ + goto jump_to_p2; + } + } + } + VdbeBranchTaken(0, 2); + MemSetTypeFlag(pIn1, MEM_Int); + break; +} + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT +/* Opcode: RealAffinity P1 * * * * +** +** If register P1 holds an integer convert it to a real value. +** +** This opcode is used when extracting information from a column that +** has REAL affinity. Such column values may still be stored as +** integers, for space efficiency, but after extraction we want them +** to have only a real value. +*/ +case OP_RealAffinity: { /* in1 */ + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + if( pIn1->flags & (MEM_Int|MEM_IntReal) ){ + testcase( pIn1->flags & MEM_Int ); + testcase( pIn1->flags & MEM_IntReal ); + sqlite3VdbeMemRealify(pIn1); + REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p1, pIn1); + } + break; +} +#endif + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CAST +/* Opcode: Cast P1 P2 * * * +** Synopsis: affinity(r[P1]) +** +** Force the value in register P1 to be the type defined by P2. +** +** <ul> +** <li> P2=='A' → BLOB +** <li> P2=='B' → TEXT +** <li> P2=='C' → NUMERIC +** <li> P2=='D' → INTEGER +** <li> P2=='E' → REAL +** </ul> +** +** A NULL value is not changed by this routine. It remains NULL. +*/ +case OP_Cast: { /* in1 */ + assert( pOp->p2>=SQLITE_AFF_BLOB && pOp->p2<=SQLITE_AFF_REAL ); + testcase( pOp->p2==SQLITE_AFF_TEXT ); + testcase( pOp->p2==SQLITE_AFF_BLOB ); + testcase( pOp->p2==SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC ); + testcase( pOp->p2==SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER ); + testcase( pOp->p2==SQLITE_AFF_REAL ); + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + memAboutToChange(p, pIn1); + rc = ExpandBlob(pIn1); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + rc = sqlite3VdbeMemCast(pIn1, pOp->p2, encoding); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pIn1); + REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p1, pIn1); + break; +} +#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_CAST */ + +/* Opcode: Eq P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 +** Synopsis: IF r[P3]==r[P1] +** +** Compare the values in register P1 and P3. If reg(P3)==reg(P1) then +** jump to address P2. +** +** The SQLITE_AFF_MASK portion of P5 must be an affinity character - +** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made +** to coerce both inputs according to this affinity before the +** comparison is made. If the SQLITE_AFF_MASK is 0x00, then numeric +** affinity is used. Note that the affinity conversions are stored +** back into the input registers P1 and P3. So this opcode can cause +** persistent changes to registers P1 and P3. +** +** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL, +** the values are compared. If both values are blobs then memcmp() is +** used to determine the results of the comparison. If both values +** are text, then the appropriate collating function specified in +** P4 is used to do the comparison. If P4 is not specified then +** memcmp() is used to compare text string. If both values are +** numeric, then a numeric comparison is used. If the two values +** are of different types, then numbers are considered less than +** strings and strings are considered less than blobs. +** +** If SQLITE_NULLEQ is set in P5 then the result of comparison is always either +** true or false and is never NULL. If both operands are NULL then the result +** of comparison is true. If either operand is NULL then the result is false. +** If neither operand is NULL the result is the same as it would be if +** the SQLITE_NULLEQ flag were omitted from P5. +** +** This opcode saves the result of comparison for use by the new +** OP_Jump opcode. +*/ +/* Opcode: Ne P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 +** Synopsis: IF r[P3]!=r[P1] +** +** This works just like the Eq opcode except that the jump is taken if +** the operands in registers P1 and P3 are not equal. See the Eq opcode for +** additional information. +*/ +/* Opcode: Lt P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 +** Synopsis: IF r[P3]<r[P1] +** +** Compare the values in register P1 and P3. If reg(P3)<reg(P1) then +** jump to address P2. +** +** If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL bit of P5 is set and either reg(P1) or +** reg(P3) is NULL then the take the jump. If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL +** bit is clear then fall through if either operand is NULL. +** +** The SQLITE_AFF_MASK portion of P5 must be an affinity character - +** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made +** to coerce both inputs according to this affinity before the +** comparison is made. If the SQLITE_AFF_MASK is 0x00, then numeric +** affinity is used. Note that the affinity conversions are stored +** back into the input registers P1 and P3. So this opcode can cause +** persistent changes to registers P1 and P3. +** +** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL, +** the values are compared. If both values are blobs then memcmp() is +** used to determine the results of the comparison. If both values +** are text, then the appropriate collating function specified in +** P4 is used to do the comparison. If P4 is not specified then +** memcmp() is used to compare text string. If both values are +** numeric, then a numeric comparison is used. If the two values +** are of different types, then numbers are considered less than +** strings and strings are considered less than blobs. +** +** This opcode saves the result of comparison for use by the new +** OP_Jump opcode. +*/ +/* Opcode: Le P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 +** Synopsis: IF r[P3]<=r[P1] +** +** This works just like the Lt opcode except that the jump is taken if +** the content of register P3 is less than or equal to the content of +** register P1. See the Lt opcode for additional information. +*/ +/* Opcode: Gt P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 +** Synopsis: IF r[P3]>r[P1] +** +** This works just like the Lt opcode except that the jump is taken if +** the content of register P3 is greater than the content of +** register P1. See the Lt opcode for additional information. +*/ +/* Opcode: Ge P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 +** Synopsis: IF r[P3]>=r[P1] +** +** This works just like the Lt opcode except that the jump is taken if +** the content of register P3 is greater than or equal to the content of +** register P1. See the Lt opcode for additional information. +*/ +case OP_Eq: /* same as TK_EQ, jump, in1, in3 */ +case OP_Ne: /* same as TK_NE, jump, in1, in3 */ +case OP_Lt: /* same as TK_LT, jump, in1, in3 */ +case OP_Le: /* same as TK_LE, jump, in1, in3 */ +case OP_Gt: /* same as TK_GT, jump, in1, in3 */ +case OP_Ge: { /* same as TK_GE, jump, in1, in3 */ + int res, res2; /* Result of the comparison of pIn1 against pIn3 */ + char affinity; /* Affinity to use for comparison */ + u16 flags1; /* Copy of initial value of pIn1->flags */ + u16 flags3; /* Copy of initial value of pIn3->flags */ + + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + flags1 = pIn1->flags; + flags3 = pIn3->flags; + if( (flags1 & flags3 & MEM_Int)!=0 ){ + assert( (pOp->p5 & SQLITE_AFF_MASK)!=SQLITE_AFF_TEXT || CORRUPT_DB ); + /* Common case of comparison of two integers */ + if( pIn3->u.i > pIn1->u.i ){ + if( sqlite3aGTb[pOp->opcode] ){ + VdbeBranchTaken(1, (pOp->p5 & SQLITE_NULLEQ)?2:3); + goto jump_to_p2; + } + iCompare = +1; + }else if( pIn3->u.i < pIn1->u.i ){ + if( sqlite3aLTb[pOp->opcode] ){ + VdbeBranchTaken(1, (pOp->p5 & SQLITE_NULLEQ)?2:3); + goto jump_to_p2; + } + iCompare = -1; + }else{ + if( sqlite3aEQb[pOp->opcode] ){ + VdbeBranchTaken(1, (pOp->p5 & SQLITE_NULLEQ)?2:3); + goto jump_to_p2; + } + iCompare = 0; + } + VdbeBranchTaken(0, (pOp->p5 & SQLITE_NULLEQ)?2:3); + break; + } + if( (flags1 | flags3)&MEM_Null ){ + /* One or both operands are NULL */ + if( pOp->p5 & SQLITE_NULLEQ ){ + /* If SQLITE_NULLEQ is set (which will only happen if the operator is + ** OP_Eq or OP_Ne) then take the jump or not depending on whether + ** or not both operands are null. + */ + assert( (flags1 & MEM_Cleared)==0 ); + assert( (pOp->p5 & SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL)==0 || CORRUPT_DB ); + testcase( (pOp->p5 & SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL)!=0 ); + if( (flags1&flags3&MEM_Null)!=0 + && (flags3&MEM_Cleared)==0 + ){ + res = 0; /* Operands are equal */ + }else{ + res = ((flags3 & MEM_Null) ? -1 : +1); /* Operands are not equal */ + } + }else{ + /* SQLITE_NULLEQ is clear and at least one operand is NULL, + ** then the result is always NULL. + ** The jump is taken if the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL bit is set. + */ + VdbeBranchTaken(2,3); + if( pOp->p5 & SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL ){ + goto jump_to_p2; + } + iCompare = 1; /* Operands are not equal */ + break; + } + }else{ + /* Neither operand is NULL and we couldn't do the special high-speed + ** integer comparison case. So do a general-case comparison. */ + affinity = pOp->p5 & SQLITE_AFF_MASK; + if( affinity>=SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC ){ + if( (flags1 | flags3)&MEM_Str ){ + if( (flags1 & (MEM_Int|MEM_IntReal|MEM_Real|MEM_Str))==MEM_Str ){ + applyNumericAffinity(pIn1,0); + testcase( flags3==pIn3->flags ); + flags3 = pIn3->flags; + } + if( (flags3 & (MEM_Int|MEM_IntReal|MEM_Real|MEM_Str))==MEM_Str ){ + applyNumericAffinity(pIn3,0); + } + } + }else if( affinity==SQLITE_AFF_TEXT ){ + if( (flags1 & MEM_Str)==0 && (flags1&(MEM_Int|MEM_Real|MEM_IntReal))!=0 ){ + testcase( pIn1->flags & MEM_Int ); + testcase( pIn1->flags & MEM_Real ); + testcase( pIn1->flags & MEM_IntReal ); + sqlite3VdbeMemStringify(pIn1, encoding, 1); + testcase( (flags1&MEM_Dyn) != (pIn1->flags&MEM_Dyn) ); + flags1 = (pIn1->flags & ~MEM_TypeMask) | (flags1 & MEM_TypeMask); + if( pIn1==pIn3 ) flags3 = flags1 | MEM_Str; + } + if( (flags3 & MEM_Str)==0 && (flags3&(MEM_Int|MEM_Real|MEM_IntReal))!=0 ){ + testcase( pIn3->flags & MEM_Int ); + testcase( pIn3->flags & MEM_Real ); + testcase( pIn3->flags & MEM_IntReal ); + sqlite3VdbeMemStringify(pIn3, encoding, 1); + testcase( (flags3&MEM_Dyn) != (pIn3->flags&MEM_Dyn) ); + flags3 = (pIn3->flags & ~MEM_TypeMask) | (flags3 & MEM_TypeMask); + } + } + assert( pOp->p4type==P4_COLLSEQ || pOp->p4.pColl==0 ); + res = sqlite3MemCompare(pIn3, pIn1, pOp->p4.pColl); + } + + /* At this point, res is negative, zero, or positive if reg[P1] is + ** less than, equal to, or greater than reg[P3], respectively. Compute + ** the answer to this operator in res2, depending on what the comparison + ** operator actually is. The next block of code depends on the fact + ** that the 6 comparison operators are consecutive integers in this + ** order: NE, EQ, GT, LE, LT, GE */ + assert( OP_Eq==OP_Ne+1 ); assert( OP_Gt==OP_Ne+2 ); assert( OP_Le==OP_Ne+3 ); + assert( OP_Lt==OP_Ne+4 ); assert( OP_Ge==OP_Ne+5 ); + if( res<0 ){ + res2 = sqlite3aLTb[pOp->opcode]; + }else if( res==0 ){ + res2 = sqlite3aEQb[pOp->opcode]; + }else{ + res2 = sqlite3aGTb[pOp->opcode]; + } + iCompare = res; + + /* Undo any changes made by applyAffinity() to the input registers. */ + assert( (pIn3->flags & MEM_Dyn) == (flags3 & MEM_Dyn) ); + pIn3->flags = flags3; + assert( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Dyn) == (flags1 & MEM_Dyn) ); + pIn1->flags = flags1; + + VdbeBranchTaken(res2!=0, (pOp->p5 & SQLITE_NULLEQ)?2:3); + if( res2 ){ + goto jump_to_p2; + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: ElseEq * P2 * * * +** +** This opcode must follow an OP_Lt or OP_Gt comparison operator. There +** can be zero or more OP_ReleaseReg opcodes intervening, but no other +** opcodes are allowed to occur between this instruction and the previous +** OP_Lt or OP_Gt. +** +** If result of an OP_Eq comparison on the same two operands as the +** prior OP_Lt or OP_Gt would have been true, then jump to P2. +** If the result of an OP_Eq comparison on the two previous +** operands would have been false or NULL, then fall through. +*/ +case OP_ElseEq: { /* same as TK_ESCAPE, jump */ + +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + /* Verify the preconditions of this opcode - that it follows an OP_Lt or + ** OP_Gt with zero or more intervening OP_ReleaseReg opcodes */ + int iAddr; + for(iAddr = (int)(pOp - aOp) - 1; ALWAYS(iAddr>=0); iAddr--){ + if( aOp[iAddr].opcode==OP_ReleaseReg ) continue; + assert( aOp[iAddr].opcode==OP_Lt || aOp[iAddr].opcode==OP_Gt ); + break; + } +#endif /* SQLITE_DEBUG */ + VdbeBranchTaken(iCompare==0, 2); + if( iCompare==0 ) goto jump_to_p2; + break; +} + + +/* Opcode: Permutation * * * P4 * +** +** Set the permutation used by the OP_Compare operator in the next +** instruction. The permutation is stored in the P4 operand. +** +** The permutation is only valid for the next opcode which must be +** an OP_Compare that has the OPFLAG_PERMUTE bit set in P5. +** +** The first integer in the P4 integer array is the length of the array +** and does not become part of the permutation. +*/ +case OP_Permutation: { + assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INTARRAY ); + assert( pOp->p4.ai ); + assert( pOp[1].opcode==OP_Compare ); + assert( pOp[1].p5 & OPFLAG_PERMUTE ); + break; +} + +/* Opcode: Compare P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 +** Synopsis: r[P1@P3] <-> r[P2@P3] +** +** Compare two vectors of registers in reg(P1)..reg(P1+P3-1) (call this +** vector "A") and in reg(P2)..reg(P2+P3-1) ("B"). Save the result of +** the comparison for use by the next OP_Jump instruct. +** +** If P5 has the OPFLAG_PERMUTE bit set, then the order of comparison is +** determined by the most recent OP_Permutation operator. If the +** OPFLAG_PERMUTE bit is clear, then register are compared in sequential +** order. +** +** P4 is a KeyInfo structure that defines collating sequences and sort +** orders for the comparison. The permutation applies to registers +** only. The KeyInfo elements are used sequentially. +** +** The comparison is a sort comparison, so NULLs compare equal, +** NULLs are less than numbers, numbers are less than strings, +** and strings are less than blobs. +** +** This opcode must be immediately followed by an OP_Jump opcode. +*/ +case OP_Compare: { + int n; + int i; + int p1; + int p2; + const KeyInfo *pKeyInfo; + u32 idx; + CollSeq *pColl; /* Collating sequence to use on this term */ + int bRev; /* True for DESCENDING sort order */ + u32 *aPermute; /* The permutation */ + + if( (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_PERMUTE)==0 ){ + aPermute = 0; + }else{ + assert( pOp>aOp ); + assert( pOp[-1].opcode==OP_Permutation ); + assert( pOp[-1].p4type==P4_INTARRAY ); + aPermute = pOp[-1].p4.ai + 1; + assert( aPermute!=0 ); + } + n = pOp->p3; + pKeyInfo = pOp->p4.pKeyInfo; + assert( n>0 ); + assert( pKeyInfo!=0 ); + p1 = pOp->p1; + p2 = pOp->p2; +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + if( aPermute ){ + int k, mx = 0; + for(k=0; k<n; k++) if( aPermute[k]>(u32)mx ) mx = aPermute[k]; + assert( p1>0 && p1+mx<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1 ); + assert( p2>0 && p2+mx<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1 ); + }else{ + assert( p1>0 && p1+n<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1 ); + assert( p2>0 && p2+n<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1 ); + } +#endif /* SQLITE_DEBUG */ + for(i=0; i<n; i++){ + idx = aPermute ? aPermute[i] : (u32)i; + assert( memIsValid(&aMem[p1+idx]) ); + assert( memIsValid(&aMem[p2+idx]) ); + REGISTER_TRACE(p1+idx, &aMem[p1+idx]); + REGISTER_TRACE(p2+idx, &aMem[p2+idx]); + assert( i<pKeyInfo->nKeyField ); + pColl = pKeyInfo->aColl[i]; + bRev = (pKeyInfo->aSortFlags[i] & KEYINFO_ORDER_DESC); + iCompare = sqlite3MemCompare(&aMem[p1+idx], &aMem[p2+idx], pColl); + if( iCompare ){ + if( (pKeyInfo->aSortFlags[i] & KEYINFO_ORDER_BIGNULL) + && ((aMem[p1+idx].flags & MEM_Null) || (aMem[p2+idx].flags & MEM_Null)) + ){ + iCompare = -iCompare; + } + if( bRev ) iCompare = -iCompare; + break; + } + } + assert( pOp[1].opcode==OP_Jump ); + break; +} + +/* Opcode: Jump P1 P2 P3 * * +** +** Jump to the instruction at address P1, P2, or P3 depending on whether +** in the most recent OP_Compare instruction the P1 vector was less than +** equal to, or greater than the P2 vector, respectively. +** +** This opcode must immediately follow an OP_Compare opcode. +*/ +case OP_Jump: { /* jump */ + assert( pOp>aOp && pOp[-1].opcode==OP_Compare ); + if( iCompare<0 ){ + VdbeBranchTaken(0,4); pOp = &aOp[pOp->p1 - 1]; + }else if( iCompare==0 ){ + VdbeBranchTaken(1,4); pOp = &aOp[pOp->p2 - 1]; + }else{ + VdbeBranchTaken(2,4); pOp = &aOp[pOp->p3 - 1]; + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: And P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: r[P3]=(r[P1] && r[P2]) +** +** Take the logical AND of the values in registers P1 and P2 and +** write the result into register P3. +** +** If either P1 or P2 is 0 (false) then the result is 0 even if +** the other input is NULL. A NULL and true or two NULLs give +** a NULL output. +*/ +/* Opcode: Or P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: r[P3]=(r[P1] || r[P2]) +** +** Take the logical OR of the values in register P1 and P2 and +** store the answer in register P3. +** +** If either P1 or P2 is nonzero (true) then the result is 1 (true) +** even if the other input is NULL. A NULL and false or two NULLs +** give a NULL output. +*/ +case OP_And: /* same as TK_AND, in1, in2, out3 */ +case OP_Or: { /* same as TK_OR, in1, in2, out3 */ + int v1; /* Left operand: 0==FALSE, 1==TRUE, 2==UNKNOWN or NULL */ + int v2; /* Right operand: 0==FALSE, 1==TRUE, 2==UNKNOWN or NULL */ + + v1 = sqlite3VdbeBooleanValue(&aMem[pOp->p1], 2); + v2 = sqlite3VdbeBooleanValue(&aMem[pOp->p2], 2); + if( pOp->opcode==OP_And ){ + static const unsigned char and_logic[] = { 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 2, 0, 2, 2 }; + v1 = and_logic[v1*3+v2]; + }else{ + static const unsigned char or_logic[] = { 0, 1, 2, 1, 1, 1, 2, 1, 2 }; + v1 = or_logic[v1*3+v2]; + } + pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + if( v1==2 ){ + MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Null); + }else{ + pOut->u.i = v1; + MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Int); + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: IsTrue P1 P2 P3 P4 * +** Synopsis: r[P2] = coalesce(r[P1]==TRUE,P3) ^ P4 +** +** This opcode implements the IS TRUE, IS FALSE, IS NOT TRUE, and +** IS NOT FALSE operators. +** +** Interpret the value in register P1 as a boolean value. Store that +** boolean (a 0 or 1) in register P2. Or if the value in register P1 is +** NULL, then the P3 is stored in register P2. Invert the answer if P4 +** is 1. +** +** The logic is summarized like this: +** +** <ul> +** <li> If P3==0 and P4==0 then r[P2] := r[P1] IS TRUE +** <li> If P3==1 and P4==1 then r[P2] := r[P1] IS FALSE +** <li> If P3==0 and P4==1 then r[P2] := r[P1] IS NOT TRUE +** <li> If P3==1 and P4==0 then r[P2] := r[P1] IS NOT FALSE +** </ul> +*/ +case OP_IsTrue: { /* in1, out2 */ + assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 ); + assert( pOp->p4.i==0 || pOp->p4.i==1 ); + assert( pOp->p3==0 || pOp->p3==1 ); + sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(&aMem[pOp->p2], + sqlite3VdbeBooleanValue(&aMem[pOp->p1], pOp->p3) ^ pOp->p4.i); + break; +} + +/* Opcode: Not P1 P2 * * * +** Synopsis: r[P2]= !r[P1] +** +** Interpret the value in register P1 as a boolean value. Store the +** boolean complement in register P2. If the value in register P1 is +** NULL, then a NULL is stored in P2. +*/ +case OP_Not: { /* same as TK_NOT, in1, out2 */ + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2]; + if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)==0 ){ + sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pOut, !sqlite3VdbeBooleanValue(pIn1,0)); + }else{ + sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut); + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: BitNot P1 P2 * * * +** Synopsis: r[P2]= ~r[P1] +** +** Interpret the content of register P1 as an integer. Store the +** ones-complement of the P1 value into register P2. If P1 holds +** a NULL then store a NULL in P2. +*/ +case OP_BitNot: { /* same as TK_BITNOT, in1, out2 */ + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2]; + sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut); + if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)==0 ){ + pOut->flags = MEM_Int; + pOut->u.i = ~sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn1); + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: Once P1 P2 * * * +** +** Fall through to the next instruction the first time this opcode is +** encountered on each invocation of the byte-code program. Jump to P2 +** on the second and all subsequent encounters during the same invocation. +** +** Top-level programs determine first invocation by comparing the P1 +** operand against the P1 operand on the OP_Init opcode at the beginning +** of the program. If the P1 values differ, then fall through and make +** the P1 of this opcode equal to the P1 of OP_Init. If P1 values are +** the same then take the jump. +** +** For subprograms, there is a bitmask in the VdbeFrame that determines +** whether or not the jump should be taken. The bitmask is necessary +** because the self-altering code trick does not work for recursive +** triggers. +*/ +case OP_Once: { /* jump */ + u32 iAddr; /* Address of this instruction */ + assert( p->aOp[0].opcode==OP_Init ); + if( p->pFrame ){ + iAddr = (int)(pOp - p->aOp); + if( (p->pFrame->aOnce[iAddr/8] & (1<<(iAddr & 7)))!=0 ){ + VdbeBranchTaken(1, 2); + goto jump_to_p2; + } + p->pFrame->aOnce[iAddr/8] |= 1<<(iAddr & 7); + }else{ + if( p->aOp[0].p1==pOp->p1 ){ + VdbeBranchTaken(1, 2); + goto jump_to_p2; + } + } + VdbeBranchTaken(0, 2); + pOp->p1 = p->aOp[0].p1; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: If P1 P2 P3 * * +** +** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is true. The value +** is considered true if it is numeric and non-zero. If the value +** in P1 is NULL then take the jump if and only if P3 is non-zero. +*/ +case OP_If: { /* jump, in1 */ + int c; + c = sqlite3VdbeBooleanValue(&aMem[pOp->p1], pOp->p3); + VdbeBranchTaken(c!=0, 2); + if( c ) goto jump_to_p2; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: IfNot P1 P2 P3 * * +** +** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is False. The value +** is considered false if it has a numeric value of zero. If the value +** in P1 is NULL then take the jump if and only if P3 is non-zero. +*/ +case OP_IfNot: { /* jump, in1 */ + int c; + c = !sqlite3VdbeBooleanValue(&aMem[pOp->p1], !pOp->p3); + VdbeBranchTaken(c!=0, 2); + if( c ) goto jump_to_p2; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: IsNull P1 P2 * * * +** Synopsis: if r[P1]==NULL goto P2 +** +** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is NULL. +*/ +case OP_IsNull: { /* same as TK_ISNULL, jump, in1 */ + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + VdbeBranchTaken( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)!=0, 2); + if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)!=0 ){ + goto jump_to_p2; + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: IsType P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 +** Synopsis: if typeof(P1.P3) in P5 goto P2 +** +** Jump to P2 if the type of a column in a btree is one of the types specified +** by the P5 bitmask. +** +** P1 is normally a cursor on a btree for which the row decode cache is +** valid through at least column P3. In other words, there should have been +** a prior OP_Column for column P3 or greater. If the cursor is not valid, +** then this opcode might give spurious results. +** The the btree row has fewer than P3 columns, then use P4 as the +** datatype. +** +** If P1 is -1, then P3 is a register number and the datatype is taken +** from the value in that register. +** +** P5 is a bitmask of data types. SQLITE_INTEGER is the least significant +** (0x01) bit. SQLITE_FLOAT is the 0x02 bit. SQLITE_TEXT is 0x04. +** SQLITE_BLOB is 0x08. SQLITE_NULL is 0x10. +** +** Take the jump to address P2 if and only if the datatype of the +** value determined by P1 and P3 corresponds to one of the bits in the +** P5 bitmask. +** +*/ +case OP_IsType: { /* jump */ + VdbeCursor *pC; + u16 typeMask; + u32 serialType; + + assert( pOp->p1>=(-1) && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + assert( pOp->p1>=0 || (pOp->p3>=0 && pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)) ); + if( pOp->p1>=0 ){ + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( pC!=0 ); + assert( pOp->p3>=0 ); + if( pOp->p3<pC->nHdrParsed ){ + serialType = pC->aType[pOp->p3]; + if( serialType>=12 ){ + if( serialType&1 ){ + typeMask = 0x04; /* SQLITE_TEXT */ + }else{ + typeMask = 0x08; /* SQLITE_BLOB */ + } + }else{ + static const unsigned char aMask[] = { + 0x10, 0x01, 0x01, 0x01, 0x01, 0x01, 0x01, 0x2, + 0x01, 0x01, 0x10, 0x10 + }; + testcase( serialType==0 ); + testcase( serialType==1 ); + testcase( serialType==2 ); + testcase( serialType==3 ); + testcase( serialType==4 ); + testcase( serialType==5 ); + testcase( serialType==6 ); + testcase( serialType==7 ); + testcase( serialType==8 ); + testcase( serialType==9 ); + testcase( serialType==10 ); + testcase( serialType==11 ); + typeMask = aMask[serialType]; + } + }else{ + typeMask = 1 << (pOp->p4.i - 1); + testcase( typeMask==0x01 ); + testcase( typeMask==0x02 ); + testcase( typeMask==0x04 ); + testcase( typeMask==0x08 ); + testcase( typeMask==0x10 ); + } + }else{ + assert( memIsValid(&aMem[pOp->p3]) ); + typeMask = 1 << (sqlite3_value_type((sqlite3_value*)&aMem[pOp->p3])-1); + testcase( typeMask==0x01 ); + testcase( typeMask==0x02 ); + testcase( typeMask==0x04 ); + testcase( typeMask==0x08 ); + testcase( typeMask==0x10 ); + } + VdbeBranchTaken( (typeMask & pOp->p5)!=0, 2); + if( typeMask & pOp->p5 ){ + goto jump_to_p2; + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: ZeroOrNull P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: r[P2] = 0 OR NULL +** +** If all both registers P1 and P3 are NOT NULL, then store a zero in +** register P2. If either registers P1 or P3 are NULL then put +** a NULL in register P2. +*/ +case OP_ZeroOrNull: { /* in1, in2, out2, in3 */ + if( (aMem[pOp->p1].flags & MEM_Null)!=0 + || (aMem[pOp->p3].flags & MEM_Null)!=0 + ){ + sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(aMem + pOp->p2); + }else{ + sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(aMem + pOp->p2, 0); + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: NotNull P1 P2 * * * +** Synopsis: if r[P1]!=NULL goto P2 +** +** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is not NULL. +*/ +case OP_NotNull: { /* same as TK_NOTNULL, jump, in1 */ + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + VdbeBranchTaken( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)==0, 2); + if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)==0 ){ + goto jump_to_p2; + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: IfNullRow P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: if P1.nullRow then r[P3]=NULL, goto P2 +** +** Check the cursor P1 to see if it is currently pointing at a NULL row. +** If it is, then set register P3 to NULL and jump immediately to P2. +** If P1 is not on a NULL row, then fall through without making any +** changes. +** +** If P1 is not an open cursor, then this opcode is a no-op. +*/ +case OP_IfNullRow: { /* jump */ + VdbeCursor *pC; + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + if( ALWAYS(pC) && pC->nullRow ){ + sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(aMem + pOp->p3); + goto jump_to_p2; + } + break; +} + +#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_OFFSET_SQL_FUNC +/* Opcode: Offset P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: r[P3] = sqlite_offset(P1) +** +** Store in register r[P3] the byte offset into the database file that is the +** start of the payload for the record at which that cursor P1 is currently +** pointing. +** +** P2 is the column number for the argument to the sqlite_offset() function. +** This opcode does not use P2 itself, but the P2 value is used by the +** code generator. The P1, P2, and P3 operands to this opcode are the +** same as for OP_Column. +** +** This opcode is only available if SQLite is compiled with the +** -DSQLITE_ENABLE_OFFSET_SQL_FUNC option. +*/ +case OP_Offset: { /* out3 */ + VdbeCursor *pC; /* The VDBE cursor */ + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + pOut = &p->aMem[pOp->p3]; + if( pC==0 || pC->eCurType!=CURTYPE_BTREE ){ + sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut); + }else{ + if( pC->deferredMoveto ){ + rc = sqlite3VdbeFinishMoveto(pC); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + } + if( sqlite3BtreeEof(pC->uc.pCursor) ){ + sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut); + }else{ + sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pOut, sqlite3BtreeOffset(pC->uc.pCursor)); + } + } + break; +} +#endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_OFFSET_SQL_FUNC */ + +/* Opcode: Column P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 +** Synopsis: r[P3]=PX cursor P1 column P2 +** +** Interpret the data that cursor P1 points to as a structure built using +** the MakeRecord instruction. (See the MakeRecord opcode for additional +** information about the format of the data.) Extract the P2-th column +** from this record. If there are less than (P2+1) +** values in the record, extract a NULL. +** +** The value extracted is stored in register P3. +** +** If the record contains fewer than P2 fields, then extract a NULL. Or, +** if the P4 argument is a P4_MEM use the value of the P4 argument as +** the result. +** +** If the OPFLAG_LENGTHARG bit is set in P5 then the result is guaranteed +** to only be used by the length() function or the equivalent. The content +** of large blobs is not loaded, thus saving CPU cycles. If the +** OPFLAG_TYPEOFARG bit is set then the result will only be used by the +** typeof() function or the IS NULL or IS NOT NULL operators or the +** equivalent. In this case, all content loading can be omitted. +*/ +case OP_Column: { + u32 p2; /* column number to retrieve */ + VdbeCursor *pC; /* The VDBE cursor */ + BtCursor *pCrsr; /* The B-Tree cursor corresponding to pC */ + u32 *aOffset; /* aOffset[i] is offset to start of data for i-th column */ + int len; /* The length of the serialized data for the column */ + int i; /* Loop counter */ + Mem *pDest; /* Where to write the extracted value */ + Mem sMem; /* For storing the record being decoded */ + const u8 *zData; /* Part of the record being decoded */ + const u8 *zHdr; /* Next unparsed byte of the header */ + const u8 *zEndHdr; /* Pointer to first byte after the header */ + u64 offset64; /* 64-bit offset */ + u32 t; /* A type code from the record header */ + Mem *pReg; /* PseudoTable input register */ + + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + assert( pOp->p3>0 && pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + p2 = (u32)pOp->p2; + +op_column_restart: + assert( pC!=0 ); + assert( p2<(u32)pC->nField + || (pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_PSEUDO && pC->seekResult==0) ); + aOffset = pC->aOffset; + assert( aOffset==pC->aType+pC->nField ); + assert( pC->eCurType!=CURTYPE_VTAB ); + assert( pC->eCurType!=CURTYPE_PSEUDO || pC->nullRow ); + assert( pC->eCurType!=CURTYPE_SORTER ); + + if( pC->cacheStatus!=p->cacheCtr ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE*/ + if( pC->nullRow ){ + if( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_PSEUDO && pC->seekResult>0 ){ + /* For the special case of as pseudo-cursor, the seekResult field + ** identifies the register that holds the record */ + pReg = &aMem[pC->seekResult]; + assert( pReg->flags & MEM_Blob ); + assert( memIsValid(pReg) ); + pC->payloadSize = pC->szRow = pReg->n; + pC->aRow = (u8*)pReg->z; + }else{ + pDest = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + memAboutToChange(p, pDest); + sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pDest); + goto op_column_out; + } + }else{ + pCrsr = pC->uc.pCursor; + if( pC->deferredMoveto ){ + u32 iMap; + assert( !pC->isEphemeral ); + if( pC->ub.aAltMap && (iMap = pC->ub.aAltMap[1+p2])>0 ){ + pC = pC->pAltCursor; + p2 = iMap - 1; + goto op_column_restart; + } + rc = sqlite3VdbeFinishMoveto(pC); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + }else if( sqlite3BtreeCursorHasMoved(pCrsr) ){ + rc = sqlite3VdbeHandleMovedCursor(pC); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + goto op_column_restart; + } + assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); + assert( pCrsr ); + assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValid(pCrsr) ); + pC->payloadSize = sqlite3BtreePayloadSize(pCrsr); + pC->aRow = sqlite3BtreePayloadFetch(pCrsr, &pC->szRow); + assert( pC->szRow<=pC->payloadSize ); + assert( pC->szRow<=65536 ); /* Maximum page size is 64KiB */ + } + pC->cacheStatus = p->cacheCtr; + if( (aOffset[0] = pC->aRow[0])<0x80 ){ + pC->iHdrOffset = 1; + }else{ + pC->iHdrOffset = sqlite3GetVarint32(pC->aRow, aOffset); + } + pC->nHdrParsed = 0; + + if( pC->szRow<aOffset[0] ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE*/ + /* pC->aRow does not have to hold the entire row, but it does at least + ** need to cover the header of the record. If pC->aRow does not contain + ** the complete header, then set it to zero, forcing the header to be + ** dynamically allocated. */ + pC->aRow = 0; + pC->szRow = 0; + + /* Make sure a corrupt database has not given us an oversize header. + ** Do this now to avoid an oversize memory allocation. + ** + ** Type entries can be between 1 and 5 bytes each. But 4 and 5 byte + ** types use so much data space that there can only be 4096 and 32 of + ** them, respectively. So the maximum header length results from a + ** 3-byte type for each of the maximum of 32768 columns plus three + ** extra bytes for the header length itself. 32768*3 + 3 = 98307. + */ + if( aOffset[0] > 98307 || aOffset[0] > pC->payloadSize ){ + goto op_column_corrupt; + } + }else{ + /* This is an optimization. By skipping over the first few tests + ** (ex: pC->nHdrParsed<=p2) in the next section, we achieve a + ** measurable performance gain. + ** + ** This branch is taken even if aOffset[0]==0. Such a record is never + ** generated by SQLite, and could be considered corruption, but we + ** accept it for historical reasons. When aOffset[0]==0, the code this + ** branch jumps to reads past the end of the record, but never more + ** than a few bytes. Even if the record occurs at the end of the page + ** content area, the "page header" comes after the page content and so + ** this overread is harmless. Similar overreads can occur for a corrupt + ** database file. + */ + zData = pC->aRow; + assert( pC->nHdrParsed<=p2 ); /* Conditional skipped */ + testcase( aOffset[0]==0 ); + goto op_column_read_header; + } + }else if( sqlite3BtreeCursorHasMoved(pC->uc.pCursor) ){ + rc = sqlite3VdbeHandleMovedCursor(pC); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + goto op_column_restart; + } + + /* Make sure at least the first p2+1 entries of the header have been + ** parsed and valid information is in aOffset[] and pC->aType[]. + */ + if( pC->nHdrParsed<=p2 ){ + /* If there is more header available for parsing in the record, try + ** to extract additional fields up through the p2+1-th field + */ + if( pC->iHdrOffset<aOffset[0] ){ + /* Make sure zData points to enough of the record to cover the header. */ + if( pC->aRow==0 ){ + memset(&sMem, 0, sizeof(sMem)); + rc = sqlite3VdbeMemFromBtreeZeroOffset(pC->uc.pCursor,aOffset[0],&sMem); + if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error; + zData = (u8*)sMem.z; + }else{ + zData = pC->aRow; + } + + /* Fill in pC->aType[i] and aOffset[i] values through the p2-th field. */ + op_column_read_header: + i = pC->nHdrParsed; + offset64 = aOffset[i]; + zHdr = zData + pC->iHdrOffset; + zEndHdr = zData + aOffset[0]; + testcase( zHdr>=zEndHdr ); + do{ + if( (pC->aType[i] = t = zHdr[0])<0x80 ){ + zHdr++; + offset64 += sqlite3VdbeOneByteSerialTypeLen(t); + }else{ + zHdr += sqlite3GetVarint32(zHdr, &t); + pC->aType[i] = t; + offset64 += sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(t); + } + aOffset[++i] = (u32)(offset64 & 0xffffffff); + }while( (u32)i<=p2 && zHdr<zEndHdr ); + + /* The record is corrupt if any of the following are true: + ** (1) the bytes of the header extend past the declared header size + ** (2) the entire header was used but not all data was used + ** (3) the end of the data extends beyond the end of the record. + */ + if( (zHdr>=zEndHdr && (zHdr>zEndHdr || offset64!=pC->payloadSize)) + || (offset64 > pC->payloadSize) + ){ + if( aOffset[0]==0 ){ + i = 0; + zHdr = zEndHdr; + }else{ + if( pC->aRow==0 ) sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(&sMem); + goto op_column_corrupt; + } + } + + pC->nHdrParsed = i; + pC->iHdrOffset = (u32)(zHdr - zData); + if( pC->aRow==0 ) sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(&sMem); + }else{ + t = 0; + } + + /* If after trying to extract new entries from the header, nHdrParsed is + ** still not up to p2, that means that the record has fewer than p2 + ** columns. So the result will be either the default value or a NULL. + */ + if( pC->nHdrParsed<=p2 ){ + pDest = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + memAboutToChange(p, pDest); + if( pOp->p4type==P4_MEM ){ + sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pDest, pOp->p4.pMem, MEM_Static); + }else{ + sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pDest); + } + goto op_column_out; + } + }else{ + t = pC->aType[p2]; + } + + /* Extract the content for the p2+1-th column. Control can only + ** reach this point if aOffset[p2], aOffset[p2+1], and pC->aType[p2] are + ** all valid. + */ + assert( p2<pC->nHdrParsed ); + assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); + pDest = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + memAboutToChange(p, pDest); + assert( sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(pDest) ); + if( VdbeMemDynamic(pDest) ){ + sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pDest); + } + assert( t==pC->aType[p2] ); + if( pC->szRow>=aOffset[p2+1] ){ + /* This is the common case where the desired content fits on the original + ** page - where the content is not on an overflow page */ + zData = pC->aRow + aOffset[p2]; + if( t<12 ){ + sqlite3VdbeSerialGet(zData, t, pDest); + }else{ + /* If the column value is a string, we need a persistent value, not + ** a MEM_Ephem value. This branch is a fast short-cut that is equivalent + ** to calling sqlite3VdbeSerialGet() and sqlite3VdbeDeephemeralize(). + */ + static const u16 aFlag[] = { MEM_Blob, MEM_Str|MEM_Term }; + pDest->n = len = (t-12)/2; + pDest->enc = encoding; + if( pDest->szMalloc < len+2 ){ + if( len>db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH] ) goto too_big; + pDest->flags = MEM_Null; + if( sqlite3VdbeMemGrow(pDest, len+2, 0) ) goto no_mem; + }else{ + pDest->z = pDest->zMalloc; + } + memcpy(pDest->z, zData, len); + pDest->z[len] = 0; + pDest->z[len+1] = 0; + pDest->flags = aFlag[t&1]; + } + }else{ + pDest->enc = encoding; + /* This branch happens only when content is on overflow pages */ + if( ((pOp->p5 & (OPFLAG_LENGTHARG|OPFLAG_TYPEOFARG))!=0 + && ((t>=12 && (t&1)==0) || (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_TYPEOFARG)!=0)) + || (len = sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(t))==0 + ){ + /* Content is irrelevant for + ** 1. the typeof() function, + ** 2. the length(X) function if X is a blob, and + ** 3. if the content length is zero. + ** So we might as well use bogus content rather than reading + ** content from disk. + ** + ** Although sqlite3VdbeSerialGet() may read at most 8 bytes from the + ** buffer passed to it, debugging function VdbeMemPrettyPrint() may + ** read more. Use the global constant sqlite3CtypeMap[] as the array, + ** as that array is 256 bytes long (plenty for VdbeMemPrettyPrint()) + ** and it begins with a bunch of zeros. + */ + sqlite3VdbeSerialGet((u8*)sqlite3CtypeMap, t, pDest); + }else{ + if( len>db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH] ) goto too_big; + rc = sqlite3VdbeMemFromBtree(pC->uc.pCursor, aOffset[p2], len, pDest); + if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error; + sqlite3VdbeSerialGet((const u8*)pDest->z, t, pDest); + pDest->flags &= ~MEM_Ephem; + } + } + +op_column_out: + UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pDest); + REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pDest); + break; + +op_column_corrupt: + if( aOp[0].p3>0 ){ + pOp = &aOp[aOp[0].p3-1]; + break; + }else{ + rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; + goto abort_due_to_error; + } +} + +/* Opcode: TypeCheck P1 P2 P3 P4 * +** Synopsis: typecheck(r[P1@P2]) +** +** Apply affinities to the range of P2 registers beginning with P1. +** Take the affinities from the Table object in P4. If any value +** cannot be coerced into the correct type, then raise an error. +** +** This opcode is similar to OP_Affinity except that this opcode +** forces the register type to the Table column type. This is used +** to implement "strict affinity". +** +** GENERATED ALWAYS AS ... STATIC columns are only checked if P3 +** is zero. When P3 is non-zero, no type checking occurs for +** static generated columns. Virtual columns are computed at query time +** and so they are never checked. +** +** Preconditions: +** +** <ul> +** <li> P2 should be the number of non-virtual columns in the +** table of P4. +** <li> Table P4 should be a STRICT table. +** </ul> +** +** If any precondition is false, an assertion fault occurs. +*/ +case OP_TypeCheck: { + Table *pTab; + Column *aCol; + int i; + + assert( pOp->p4type==P4_TABLE ); + pTab = pOp->p4.pTab; + assert( pTab->tabFlags & TF_Strict ); + assert( pTab->nNVCol==pOp->p2 ); + aCol = pTab->aCol; + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + for(i=0; i<pTab->nCol; i++){ + if( aCol[i].colFlags & COLFLAG_GENERATED ){ + if( aCol[i].colFlags & COLFLAG_VIRTUAL ) continue; + if( pOp->p3 ){ pIn1++; continue; } + } + assert( pIn1 < &aMem[pOp->p1+pOp->p2] ); + applyAffinity(pIn1, aCol[i].affinity, encoding); + if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)==0 ){ + switch( aCol[i].eCType ){ + case COLTYPE_BLOB: { + if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Blob)==0 ) goto vdbe_type_error; + break; + } + case COLTYPE_INTEGER: + case COLTYPE_INT: { + if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Int)==0 ) goto vdbe_type_error; + break; + } + case COLTYPE_TEXT: { + if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Str)==0 ) goto vdbe_type_error; + break; + } + case COLTYPE_REAL: { + testcase( (pIn1->flags & (MEM_Real|MEM_IntReal))==MEM_Real ); + testcase( (pIn1->flags & (MEM_Real|MEM_IntReal))==MEM_IntReal ); + if( pIn1->flags & MEM_Int ){ + /* When applying REAL affinity, if the result is still an MEM_Int + ** that will fit in 6 bytes, then change the type to MEM_IntReal + ** so that we keep the high-resolution integer value but know that + ** the type really wants to be REAL. */ + testcase( pIn1->u.i==140737488355328LL ); + testcase( pIn1->u.i==140737488355327LL ); + testcase( pIn1->u.i==-140737488355328LL ); + testcase( pIn1->u.i==-140737488355329LL ); + if( pIn1->u.i<=140737488355327LL && pIn1->u.i>=-140737488355328LL){ + pIn1->flags |= MEM_IntReal; + pIn1->flags &= ~MEM_Int; + }else{ + pIn1->u.r = (double)pIn1->u.i; + pIn1->flags |= MEM_Real; + pIn1->flags &= ~MEM_Int; + } + }else if( (pIn1->flags & (MEM_Real|MEM_IntReal))==0 ){ + goto vdbe_type_error; + } + break; + } + default: { + /* COLTYPE_ANY. Accept anything. */ + break; + } + } + } + REGISTER_TRACE((int)(pIn1-aMem), pIn1); + pIn1++; + } + assert( pIn1 == &aMem[pOp->p1+pOp->p2] ); + break; + +vdbe_type_error: + sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot store %s value in %s column %s.%s", + vdbeMemTypeName(pIn1), sqlite3StdType[aCol[i].eCType-1], + pTab->zName, aCol[i].zCnName); + rc = SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_DATATYPE; + goto abort_due_to_error; +} + +/* Opcode: Affinity P1 P2 * P4 * +** Synopsis: affinity(r[P1@P2]) +** +** Apply affinities to a range of P2 registers starting with P1. +** +** P4 is a string that is P2 characters long. The N-th character of the +** string indicates the column affinity that should be used for the N-th +** memory cell in the range. +*/ +case OP_Affinity: { + const char *zAffinity; /* The affinity to be applied */ + + zAffinity = pOp->p4.z; + assert( zAffinity!=0 ); + assert( pOp->p2>0 ); + assert( zAffinity[pOp->p2]==0 ); + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + while( 1 /*exit-by-break*/ ){ + assert( pIn1 <= &p->aMem[(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)] ); + assert( zAffinity[0]==SQLITE_AFF_NONE || memIsValid(pIn1) ); + applyAffinity(pIn1, zAffinity[0], encoding); + if( zAffinity[0]==SQLITE_AFF_REAL && (pIn1->flags & MEM_Int)!=0 ){ + /* When applying REAL affinity, if the result is still an MEM_Int + ** that will fit in 6 bytes, then change the type to MEM_IntReal + ** so that we keep the high-resolution integer value but know that + ** the type really wants to be REAL. */ + testcase( pIn1->u.i==140737488355328LL ); + testcase( pIn1->u.i==140737488355327LL ); + testcase( pIn1->u.i==-140737488355328LL ); + testcase( pIn1->u.i==-140737488355329LL ); + if( pIn1->u.i<=140737488355327LL && pIn1->u.i>=-140737488355328LL ){ + pIn1->flags |= MEM_IntReal; + pIn1->flags &= ~MEM_Int; + }else{ + pIn1->u.r = (double)pIn1->u.i; + pIn1->flags |= MEM_Real; + pIn1->flags &= ~MEM_Int; + } + } + REGISTER_TRACE((int)(pIn1-aMem), pIn1); + zAffinity++; + if( zAffinity[0]==0 ) break; + pIn1++; + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: MakeRecord P1 P2 P3 P4 * +** Synopsis: r[P3]=mkrec(r[P1@P2]) +** +** Convert P2 registers beginning with P1 into the [record format] +** use as a data record in a database table or as a key +** in an index. The OP_Column opcode can decode the record later. +** +** P4 may be a string that is P2 characters long. The N-th character of the +** string indicates the column affinity that should be used for the N-th +** field of the index key. +** +** The mapping from character to affinity is given by the SQLITE_AFF_ +** macros defined in sqliteInt.h. +** +** If P4 is NULL then all index fields have the affinity BLOB. +** +** The meaning of P5 depends on whether or not the SQLITE_ENABLE_NULL_TRIM +** compile-time option is enabled: +** +** * If SQLITE_ENABLE_NULL_TRIM is enabled, then the P5 is the index +** of the right-most table that can be null-trimmed. +** +** * If SQLITE_ENABLE_NULL_TRIM is omitted, then P5 has the value +** OPFLAG_NOCHNG_MAGIC if the OP_MakeRecord opcode is allowed to +** accept no-change records with serial_type 10. This value is +** only used inside an assert() and does not affect the end result. +*/ +case OP_MakeRecord: { + Mem *pRec; /* The new record */ + u64 nData; /* Number of bytes of data space */ + int nHdr; /* Number of bytes of header space */ + i64 nByte; /* Data space required for this record */ + i64 nZero; /* Number of zero bytes at the end of the record */ + int nVarint; /* Number of bytes in a varint */ + u32 serial_type; /* Type field */ + Mem *pData0; /* First field to be combined into the record */ + Mem *pLast; /* Last field of the record */ + int nField; /* Number of fields in the record */ + char *zAffinity; /* The affinity string for the record */ + u32 len; /* Length of a field */ + u8 *zHdr; /* Where to write next byte of the header */ + u8 *zPayload; /* Where to write next byte of the payload */ + + /* Assuming the record contains N fields, the record format looks + ** like this: + ** + ** ------------------------------------------------------------------------ + ** | hdr-size | type 0 | type 1 | ... | type N-1 | data0 | ... | data N-1 | + ** ------------------------------------------------------------------------ + ** + ** Data(0) is taken from register P1. Data(1) comes from register P1+1 + ** and so forth. + ** + ** Each type field is a varint representing the serial type of the + ** corresponding data element (see sqlite3VdbeSerialType()). The + ** hdr-size field is also a varint which is the offset from the beginning + ** of the record to data0. + */ + nData = 0; /* Number of bytes of data space */ + nHdr = 0; /* Number of bytes of header space */ + nZero = 0; /* Number of zero bytes at the end of the record */ + nField = pOp->p1; + zAffinity = pOp->p4.z; + assert( nField>0 && pOp->p2>0 && pOp->p2+nField<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1 ); + pData0 = &aMem[nField]; + nField = pOp->p2; + pLast = &pData0[nField-1]; + + /* Identify the output register */ + assert( pOp->p3<pOp->p1 || pOp->p3>=pOp->p1+pOp->p2 ); + pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + memAboutToChange(p, pOut); + + /* Apply the requested affinity to all inputs + */ + assert( pData0<=pLast ); + if( zAffinity ){ + pRec = pData0; + do{ + applyAffinity(pRec, zAffinity[0], encoding); + if( zAffinity[0]==SQLITE_AFF_REAL && (pRec->flags & MEM_Int) ){ + pRec->flags |= MEM_IntReal; + pRec->flags &= ~(MEM_Int); + } + REGISTER_TRACE((int)(pRec-aMem), pRec); + zAffinity++; + pRec++; + assert( zAffinity[0]==0 || pRec<=pLast ); + }while( zAffinity[0] ); + } + +#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_NULL_TRIM + /* NULLs can be safely trimmed from the end of the record, as long as + ** as the schema format is 2 or more and none of the omitted columns + ** have a non-NULL default value. Also, the record must be left with + ** at least one field. If P5>0 then it will be one more than the + ** index of the right-most column with a non-NULL default value */ + if( pOp->p5 ){ + while( (pLast->flags & MEM_Null)!=0 && nField>pOp->p5 ){ + pLast--; + nField--; + } + } +#endif + + /* Loop through the elements that will make up the record to figure + ** out how much space is required for the new record. After this loop, + ** the Mem.uTemp field of each term should hold the serial-type that will + ** be used for that term in the generated record: + ** + ** Mem.uTemp value type + ** --------------- --------------- + ** 0 NULL + ** 1 1-byte signed integer + ** 2 2-byte signed integer + ** 3 3-byte signed integer + ** 4 4-byte signed integer + ** 5 6-byte signed integer + ** 6 8-byte signed integer + ** 7 IEEE float + ** 8 Integer constant 0 + ** 9 Integer constant 1 + ** 10,11 reserved for expansion + ** N>=12 and even BLOB + ** N>=13 and odd text + ** + ** The following additional values are computed: + ** nHdr Number of bytes needed for the record header + ** nData Number of bytes of data space needed for the record + ** nZero Zero bytes at the end of the record + */ + pRec = pLast; + do{ + assert( memIsValid(pRec) ); + if( pRec->flags & MEM_Null ){ + if( pRec->flags & MEM_Zero ){ + /* Values with MEM_Null and MEM_Zero are created by xColumn virtual + ** table methods that never invoke sqlite3_result_xxxxx() while + ** computing an unchanging column value in an UPDATE statement. + ** Give such values a special internal-use-only serial-type of 10 + ** so that they can be passed through to xUpdate and have + ** a true sqlite3_value_nochange(). */ +#ifndef SQLITE_ENABLE_NULL_TRIM + assert( pOp->p5==OPFLAG_NOCHNG_MAGIC || CORRUPT_DB ); +#endif + pRec->uTemp = 10; + }else{ + pRec->uTemp = 0; + } + nHdr++; + }else if( pRec->flags & (MEM_Int|MEM_IntReal) ){ + /* Figure out whether to use 1, 2, 4, 6 or 8 bytes. */ + i64 i = pRec->u.i; + u64 uu; + testcase( pRec->flags & MEM_Int ); + testcase( pRec->flags & MEM_IntReal ); + if( i<0 ){ + uu = ~i; + }else{ + uu = i; + } + nHdr++; + testcase( uu==127 ); testcase( uu==128 ); + testcase( uu==32767 ); testcase( uu==32768 ); + testcase( uu==8388607 ); testcase( uu==8388608 ); + testcase( uu==2147483647 ); testcase( uu==2147483648LL ); + testcase( uu==140737488355327LL ); testcase( uu==140737488355328LL ); + if( uu<=127 ){ + if( (i&1)==i && p->minWriteFileFormat>=4 ){ + pRec->uTemp = 8+(u32)uu; + }else{ + nData++; + pRec->uTemp = 1; + } + }else if( uu<=32767 ){ + nData += 2; + pRec->uTemp = 2; + }else if( uu<=8388607 ){ + nData += 3; + pRec->uTemp = 3; + }else if( uu<=2147483647 ){ + nData += 4; + pRec->uTemp = 4; + }else if( uu<=140737488355327LL ){ + nData += 6; + pRec->uTemp = 5; + }else{ + nData += 8; + if( pRec->flags & MEM_IntReal ){ + /* If the value is IntReal and is going to take up 8 bytes to store + ** as an integer, then we might as well make it an 8-byte floating + ** point value */ + pRec->u.r = (double)pRec->u.i; + pRec->flags &= ~MEM_IntReal; + pRec->flags |= MEM_Real; + pRec->uTemp = 7; + }else{ + pRec->uTemp = 6; + } + } + }else if( pRec->flags & MEM_Real ){ + nHdr++; + nData += 8; + pRec->uTemp = 7; + }else{ + assert( db->mallocFailed || pRec->flags&(MEM_Str|MEM_Blob) ); + assert( pRec->n>=0 ); + len = (u32)pRec->n; + serial_type = (len*2) + 12 + ((pRec->flags & MEM_Str)!=0); + if( pRec->flags & MEM_Zero ){ + serial_type += pRec->u.nZero*2; + if( nData ){ + if( sqlite3VdbeMemExpandBlob(pRec) ) goto no_mem; + len += pRec->u.nZero; + }else{ + nZero += pRec->u.nZero; + } + } + nData += len; + nHdr += sqlite3VarintLen(serial_type); + pRec->uTemp = serial_type; + } + if( pRec==pData0 ) break; + pRec--; + }while(1); + + /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-22564-11647 The header begins with a single varint + ** which determines the total number of bytes in the header. The varint + ** value is the size of the header in bytes including the size varint + ** itself. */ + testcase( nHdr==126 ); + testcase( nHdr==127 ); + if( nHdr<=126 ){ + /* The common case */ + nHdr += 1; + }else{ + /* Rare case of a really large header */ + nVarint = sqlite3VarintLen(nHdr); + nHdr += nVarint; + if( nVarint<sqlite3VarintLen(nHdr) ) nHdr++; + } + nByte = nHdr+nData; + + /* Make sure the output register has a buffer large enough to store + ** the new record. The output register (pOp->p3) is not allowed to + ** be one of the input registers (because the following call to + ** sqlite3VdbeMemClearAndResize() could clobber the value before it is used). + */ + if( nByte+nZero<=pOut->szMalloc ){ + /* The output register is already large enough to hold the record. + ** No error checks or buffer enlargement is required */ + pOut->z = pOut->zMalloc; + }else{ + /* Need to make sure that the output is not too big and then enlarge + ** the output register to hold the full result */ + if( nByte+nZero>db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH] ){ + goto too_big; + } + if( sqlite3VdbeMemClearAndResize(pOut, (int)nByte) ){ + goto no_mem; + } + } + pOut->n = (int)nByte; + pOut->flags = MEM_Blob; + if( nZero ){ + pOut->u.nZero = nZero; + pOut->flags |= MEM_Zero; + } + UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pOut); + zHdr = (u8 *)pOut->z; + zPayload = zHdr + nHdr; + + /* Write the record */ + if( nHdr<0x80 ){ + *(zHdr++) = nHdr; + }else{ + zHdr += sqlite3PutVarint(zHdr,nHdr); + } + assert( pData0<=pLast ); + pRec = pData0; + while( 1 /*exit-by-break*/ ){ + serial_type = pRec->uTemp; + /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-06529-47362 Following the size varint are one or more + ** additional varints, one per column. + ** EVIDENCE-OF: R-64536-51728 The values for each column in the record + ** immediately follow the header. */ + if( serial_type<=7 ){ + *(zHdr++) = serial_type; + if( serial_type==0 ){ + /* NULL value. No change in zPayload */ + }else{ + u64 v; + u32 i; + if( serial_type==7 ){ + assert( sizeof(v)==sizeof(pRec->u.r) ); + memcpy(&v, &pRec->u.r, sizeof(v)); + swapMixedEndianFloat(v); + }else{ + v = pRec->u.i; + } + len = i = sqlite3SmallTypeSizes[serial_type]; + assert( i>0 ); + while( 1 /*exit-by-break*/ ){ + zPayload[--i] = (u8)(v&0xFF); + if( i==0 ) break; + v >>= 8; + } + zPayload += len; + } + }else if( serial_type<0x80 ){ + *(zHdr++) = serial_type; + if( serial_type>=14 && pRec->n>0 ){ + assert( pRec->z!=0 ); + memcpy(zPayload, pRec->z, pRec->n); + zPayload += pRec->n; + } + }else{ + zHdr += sqlite3PutVarint(zHdr, serial_type); + if( pRec->n ){ + assert( pRec->z!=0 ); + memcpy(zPayload, pRec->z, pRec->n); + zPayload += pRec->n; + } + } + if( pRec==pLast ) break; + pRec++; + } + assert( nHdr==(int)(zHdr - (u8*)pOut->z) ); + assert( nByte==(int)(zPayload - (u8*)pOut->z) ); + + assert( pOp->p3>0 && pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); + REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pOut); + break; +} + +/* Opcode: Count P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: r[P2]=count() +** +** Store the number of entries (an integer value) in the table or index +** opened by cursor P1 in register P2. +** +** If P3==0, then an exact count is obtained, which involves visiting +** every btree page of the table. But if P3 is non-zero, an estimate +** is returned based on the current cursor position. +*/ +case OP_Count: { /* out2 */ + i64 nEntry; + BtCursor *pCrsr; + + assert( p->apCsr[pOp->p1]->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); + pCrsr = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]->uc.pCursor; + assert( pCrsr ); + if( pOp->p3 ){ + nEntry = sqlite3BtreeRowCountEst(pCrsr); + }else{ + nEntry = 0; /* Not needed. Only used to silence a warning. */ + rc = sqlite3BtreeCount(db, pCrsr, &nEntry); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + } + pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); + pOut->u.i = nEntry; + goto check_for_interrupt; +} + +/* Opcode: Savepoint P1 * * P4 * +** +** Open, release or rollback the savepoint named by parameter P4, depending +** on the value of P1. To open a new savepoint set P1==0 (SAVEPOINT_BEGIN). +** To release (commit) an existing savepoint set P1==1 (SAVEPOINT_RELEASE). +** To rollback an existing savepoint set P1==2 (SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK). +*/ +case OP_Savepoint: { + int p1; /* Value of P1 operand */ + char *zName; /* Name of savepoint */ + int nName; + Savepoint *pNew; + Savepoint *pSavepoint; + Savepoint *pTmp; + int iSavepoint; + int ii; + + p1 = pOp->p1; + zName = pOp->p4.z; + + /* Assert that the p1 parameter is valid. Also that if there is no open + ** transaction, then there cannot be any savepoints. + */ + assert( db->pSavepoint==0 || db->autoCommit==0 ); + assert( p1==SAVEPOINT_BEGIN||p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE||p1==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ); + assert( db->pSavepoint || db->isTransactionSavepoint==0 ); + assert( checkSavepointCount(db) ); + assert( p->bIsReader ); + + if( p1==SAVEPOINT_BEGIN ){ + if( db->nVdbeWrite>0 ){ + /* A new savepoint cannot be created if there are active write + ** statements (i.e. open read/write incremental blob handles). + */ + sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot open savepoint - SQL statements in progress"); + rc = SQLITE_BUSY; + }else{ + nName = sqlite3Strlen30(zName); + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE + /* This call is Ok even if this savepoint is actually a transaction + ** savepoint (and therefore should not prompt xSavepoint()) callbacks. + ** If this is a transaction savepoint being opened, it is guaranteed + ** that the db->aVTrans[] array is empty. */ + assert( db->autoCommit==0 || db->nVTrans==0 ); + rc = sqlite3VtabSavepoint(db, SAVEPOINT_BEGIN, + db->nStatement+db->nSavepoint); + if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error; +#endif + + /* Create a new savepoint structure. */ + pNew = sqlite3DbMallocRawNN(db, sizeof(Savepoint)+nName+1); + if( pNew ){ + pNew->zName = (char *)&pNew[1]; + memcpy(pNew->zName, zName, nName+1); + + /* If there is no open transaction, then mark this as a special + ** "transaction savepoint". */ + if( db->autoCommit ){ + db->autoCommit = 0; + db->isTransactionSavepoint = 1; + }else{ + db->nSavepoint++; + } + + /* Link the new savepoint into the database handle's list. */ + pNew->pNext = db->pSavepoint; + db->pSavepoint = pNew; + pNew->nDeferredCons = db->nDeferredCons; + pNew->nDeferredImmCons = db->nDeferredImmCons; + } + } + }else{ + assert( p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE || p1==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ); + iSavepoint = 0; + + /* Find the named savepoint. If there is no such savepoint, then an + ** an error is returned to the user. */ + for( + pSavepoint = db->pSavepoint; + pSavepoint && sqlite3StrICmp(pSavepoint->zName, zName); + pSavepoint = pSavepoint->pNext + ){ + iSavepoint++; + } + if( !pSavepoint ){ + sqlite3VdbeError(p, "no such savepoint: %s", zName); + rc = SQLITE_ERROR; + }else if( db->nVdbeWrite>0 && p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){ + /* It is not possible to release (commit) a savepoint if there are + ** active write statements. + */ + sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot release savepoint - " + "SQL statements in progress"); + rc = SQLITE_BUSY; + }else{ + + /* Determine whether or not this is a transaction savepoint. If so, + ** and this is a RELEASE command, then the current transaction + ** is committed. + */ + int isTransaction = pSavepoint->pNext==0 && db->isTransactionSavepoint; + if( isTransaction && p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){ + if( (rc = sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 1))!=SQLITE_OK ){ + goto vdbe_return; + } + db->autoCommit = 1; + if( sqlite3VdbeHalt(p)==SQLITE_BUSY ){ + p->pc = (int)(pOp - aOp); + db->autoCommit = 0; + p->rc = rc = SQLITE_BUSY; + goto vdbe_return; + } + rc = p->rc; + if( rc ){ + db->autoCommit = 0; + }else{ + db->isTransactionSavepoint = 0; + } + }else{ + int isSchemaChange; + iSavepoint = db->nSavepoint - iSavepoint - 1; + if( p1==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ){ + isSchemaChange = (db->mDbFlags & DBFLAG_SchemaChange)!=0; + for(ii=0; ii<db->nDb; ii++){ + rc = sqlite3BtreeTripAllCursors(db->aDb[ii].pBt, + SQLITE_ABORT_ROLLBACK, + isSchemaChange==0); + if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error; + } + }else{ + assert( p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ); + isSchemaChange = 0; + } + for(ii=0; ii<db->nDb; ii++){ + rc = sqlite3BtreeSavepoint(db->aDb[ii].pBt, p1, iSavepoint); + if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ + goto abort_due_to_error; + } + } + if( isSchemaChange ){ + sqlite3ExpirePreparedStatements(db, 0); + sqlite3ResetAllSchemasOfConnection(db); + db->mDbFlags |= DBFLAG_SchemaChange; + } + } + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + + /* Regardless of whether this is a RELEASE or ROLLBACK, destroy all + ** savepoints nested inside of the savepoint being operated on. */ + while( db->pSavepoint!=pSavepoint ){ + pTmp = db->pSavepoint; + db->pSavepoint = pTmp->pNext; + sqlite3DbFree(db, pTmp); + db->nSavepoint--; + } + + /* If it is a RELEASE, then destroy the savepoint being operated on + ** too. If it is a ROLLBACK TO, then set the number of deferred + ** constraint violations present in the database to the value stored + ** when the savepoint was created. */ + if( p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){ + assert( pSavepoint==db->pSavepoint ); + db->pSavepoint = pSavepoint->pNext; + sqlite3DbFree(db, pSavepoint); + if( !isTransaction ){ + db->nSavepoint--; + } + }else{ + assert( p1==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ); + db->nDeferredCons = pSavepoint->nDeferredCons; + db->nDeferredImmCons = pSavepoint->nDeferredImmCons; + } + + if( !isTransaction || p1==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ){ + rc = sqlite3VtabSavepoint(db, p1, iSavepoint); + if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error; + } + } + } + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + if( p->eVdbeState==VDBE_HALT_STATE ){ + rc = SQLITE_DONE; + goto vdbe_return; + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: AutoCommit P1 P2 * * * +** +** Set the database auto-commit flag to P1 (1 or 0). If P2 is true, roll +** back any currently active btree transactions. If there are any active +** VMs (apart from this one), then a ROLLBACK fails. A COMMIT fails if +** there are active writing VMs or active VMs that use shared cache. +** +** This instruction causes the VM to halt. +*/ +case OP_AutoCommit: { + int desiredAutoCommit; + int iRollback; + + desiredAutoCommit = pOp->p1; + iRollback = pOp->p2; + assert( desiredAutoCommit==1 || desiredAutoCommit==0 ); + assert( desiredAutoCommit==1 || iRollback==0 ); + assert( db->nVdbeActive>0 ); /* At least this one VM is active */ + assert( p->bIsReader ); + + if( desiredAutoCommit!=db->autoCommit ){ + if( iRollback ){ + assert( desiredAutoCommit==1 ); + sqlite3RollbackAll(db, SQLITE_ABORT_ROLLBACK); + db->autoCommit = 1; + }else if( desiredAutoCommit && db->nVdbeWrite>0 ){ + /* If this instruction implements a COMMIT and other VMs are writing + ** return an error indicating that the other VMs must complete first. + */ + sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot commit transaction - " + "SQL statements in progress"); + rc = SQLITE_BUSY; + goto abort_due_to_error; + }else if( (rc = sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 1))!=SQLITE_OK ){ + goto vdbe_return; + }else{ + db->autoCommit = (u8)desiredAutoCommit; + } + if( sqlite3VdbeHalt(p)==SQLITE_BUSY ){ + p->pc = (int)(pOp - aOp); + db->autoCommit = (u8)(1-desiredAutoCommit); + p->rc = rc = SQLITE_BUSY; + goto vdbe_return; + } + sqlite3CloseSavepoints(db); + if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){ + rc = SQLITE_DONE; + }else{ + rc = SQLITE_ERROR; + } + goto vdbe_return; + }else{ + sqlite3VdbeError(p, + (!desiredAutoCommit)?"cannot start a transaction within a transaction":( + (iRollback)?"cannot rollback - no transaction is active": + "cannot commit - no transaction is active")); + + rc = SQLITE_ERROR; + goto abort_due_to_error; + } + /*NOTREACHED*/ assert(0); +} + +/* Opcode: Transaction P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 +** +** Begin a transaction on database P1 if a transaction is not already +** active. +** If P2 is non-zero, then a write-transaction is started, or if a +** read-transaction is already active, it is upgraded to a write-transaction. +** If P2 is zero, then a read-transaction is started. If P2 is 2 or more +** then an exclusive transaction is started. +** +** P1 is the index of the database file on which the transaction is +** started. Index 0 is the main database file and index 1 is the +** file used for temporary tables. Indices of 2 or more are used for +** attached databases. +** +** If a write-transaction is started and the Vdbe.usesStmtJournal flag is +** true (this flag is set if the Vdbe may modify more than one row and may +** throw an ABORT exception), a statement transaction may also be opened. +** More specifically, a statement transaction is opened iff the database +** connection is currently not in autocommit mode, or if there are other +** active statements. A statement transaction allows the changes made by this +** VDBE to be rolled back after an error without having to roll back the +** entire transaction. If no error is encountered, the statement transaction +** will automatically commit when the VDBE halts. +** +** If P5!=0 then this opcode also checks the schema cookie against P3 +** and the schema generation counter against P4. +** The cookie changes its value whenever the database schema changes. +** This operation is used to detect when that the cookie has changed +** and that the current process needs to reread the schema. If the schema +** cookie in P3 differs from the schema cookie in the database header or +** if the schema generation counter in P4 differs from the current +** generation counter, then an SQLITE_SCHEMA error is raised and execution +** halts. The sqlite3_step() wrapper function might then reprepare the +** statement and rerun it from the beginning. +*/ +case OP_Transaction: { + Btree *pBt; + Db *pDb; + int iMeta = 0; + + assert( p->bIsReader ); + assert( p->readOnly==0 || pOp->p2==0 ); + assert( pOp->p2>=0 && pOp->p2<=2 ); + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb ); + assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p1) ); + assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); + if( pOp->p2 && (db->flags & (SQLITE_QueryOnly|SQLITE_CorruptRdOnly))!=0 ){ + if( db->flags & SQLITE_QueryOnly ){ + /* Writes prohibited by the "PRAGMA query_only=TRUE" statement */ + rc = SQLITE_READONLY; + }else{ + /* Writes prohibited due to a prior SQLITE_CORRUPT in the current + ** transaction */ + rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT; + } + goto abort_due_to_error; + } + pDb = &db->aDb[pOp->p1]; + pBt = pDb->pBt; + + if( pBt ){ + rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(pBt, pOp->p2, &iMeta); + testcase( rc==SQLITE_BUSY_SNAPSHOT ); + testcase( rc==SQLITE_BUSY_RECOVERY ); + if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ + if( (rc&0xff)==SQLITE_BUSY ){ + p->pc = (int)(pOp - aOp); + p->rc = rc; + goto vdbe_return; + } + goto abort_due_to_error; + } + + if( p->usesStmtJournal + && pOp->p2 + && (db->autoCommit==0 || db->nVdbeRead>1) + ){ + assert( sqlite3BtreeTxnState(pBt)==SQLITE_TXN_WRITE ); + if( p->iStatement==0 ){ + assert( db->nStatement>=0 && db->nSavepoint>=0 ); + db->nStatement++; + p->iStatement = db->nSavepoint + db->nStatement; + } + + rc = sqlite3VtabSavepoint(db, SAVEPOINT_BEGIN, p->iStatement-1); + if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ + rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginStmt(pBt, p->iStatement); + } + + /* Store the current value of the database handles deferred constraint + ** counter. If the statement transaction needs to be rolled back, + ** the value of this counter needs to be restored too. */ + p->nStmtDefCons = db->nDeferredCons; + p->nStmtDefImmCons = db->nDeferredImmCons; + } + } + assert( pOp->p5==0 || pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 ); + if( rc==SQLITE_OK + && pOp->p5 + && (iMeta!=pOp->p3 || pDb->pSchema->iGeneration!=pOp->p4.i) + ){ + /* + ** IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-03189-51135 As each SQL statement runs, the schema + ** version is checked to ensure that the schema has not changed since the + ** SQL statement was prepared. + */ + sqlite3DbFree(db, p->zErrMsg); + p->zErrMsg = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, "database schema has changed"); + /* If the schema-cookie from the database file matches the cookie + ** stored with the in-memory representation of the schema, do + ** not reload the schema from the database file. + ** + ** If virtual-tables are in use, this is not just an optimization. + ** Often, v-tables store their data in other SQLite tables, which + ** are queried from within xNext() and other v-table methods using + ** prepared queries. If such a query is out-of-date, we do not want to + ** discard the database schema, as the user code implementing the + ** v-table would have to be ready for the sqlite3_vtab structure itself + ** to be invalidated whenever sqlite3_step() is called from within + ** a v-table method. + */ + if( db->aDb[pOp->p1].pSchema->schema_cookie!=iMeta ){ + sqlite3ResetOneSchema(db, pOp->p1); + } + p->expired = 1; + rc = SQLITE_SCHEMA; + + /* Set changeCntOn to 0 to prevent the value returned by sqlite3_changes() + ** from being modified in sqlite3VdbeHalt(). If this statement is + ** reprepared, changeCntOn will be set again. */ + p->changeCntOn = 0; + } + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: ReadCookie P1 P2 P3 * * +** +** Read cookie number P3 from database P1 and write it into register P2. +** P3==1 is the schema version. P3==2 is the database format. +** P3==3 is the recommended pager cache size, and so forth. P1==0 is +** the main database file and P1==1 is the database file used to store +** temporary tables. +** +** There must be a read-lock on the database (either a transaction +** must be started or there must be an open cursor) before +** executing this instruction. +*/ +case OP_ReadCookie: { /* out2 */ + int iMeta; + int iDb; + int iCookie; + + assert( p->bIsReader ); + iDb = pOp->p1; + iCookie = pOp->p3; + assert( pOp->p3<SQLITE_N_BTREE_META ); + assert( iDb>=0 && iDb<db->nDb ); + assert( db->aDb[iDb].pBt!=0 ); + assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, iDb) ); + + sqlite3BtreeGetMeta(db->aDb[iDb].pBt, iCookie, (u32 *)&iMeta); + pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); + pOut->u.i = iMeta; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: SetCookie P1 P2 P3 * P5 +** +** Write the integer value P3 into cookie number P2 of database P1. +** P2==1 is the schema version. P2==2 is the database format. +** P2==3 is the recommended pager cache +** size, and so forth. P1==0 is the main database file and P1==1 is the +** database file used to store temporary tables. +** +** A transaction must be started before executing this opcode. +** +** If P2 is the SCHEMA_VERSION cookie (cookie number 1) then the internal +** schema version is set to P3-P5. The "PRAGMA schema_version=N" statement +** has P5 set to 1, so that the internal schema version will be different +** from the database schema version, resulting in a schema reset. +*/ +case OP_SetCookie: { + Db *pDb; + + sqlite3VdbeIncrWriteCounter(p, 0); + assert( pOp->p2<SQLITE_N_BTREE_META ); + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb ); + assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p1) ); + assert( p->readOnly==0 ); + pDb = &db->aDb[pOp->p1]; + assert( pDb->pBt!=0 ); + assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, pOp->p1, 0) ); + /* See note about index shifting on OP_ReadCookie */ + rc = sqlite3BtreeUpdateMeta(pDb->pBt, pOp->p2, pOp->p3); + if( pOp->p2==BTREE_SCHEMA_VERSION ){ + /* When the schema cookie changes, record the new cookie internally */ + *(u32*)&pDb->pSchema->schema_cookie = *(u32*)&pOp->p3 - pOp->p5; + db->mDbFlags |= DBFLAG_SchemaChange; + sqlite3FkClearTriggerCache(db, pOp->p1); + }else if( pOp->p2==BTREE_FILE_FORMAT ){ + /* Record changes in the file format */ + pDb->pSchema->file_format = pOp->p3; + } + if( pOp->p1==1 ){ + /* Invalidate all prepared statements whenever the TEMP database + ** schema is changed. Ticket #1644 */ + sqlite3ExpirePreparedStatements(db, 0); + p->expired = 0; + } + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: OpenRead P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 +** Synopsis: root=P2 iDb=P3 +** +** Open a read-only cursor for the database table whose root page is +** P2 in a database file. The database file is determined by P3. +** P3==0 means the main database, P3==1 means the database used for +** temporary tables, and P3>1 means used the corresponding attached +** database. Give the new cursor an identifier of P1. The P1 +** values need not be contiguous but all P1 values should be small integers. +** It is an error for P1 to be negative. +** +** Allowed P5 bits: +** <ul> +** <li> <b>0x02 OPFLAG_SEEKEQ</b>: This cursor will only be used for +** equality lookups (implemented as a pair of opcodes OP_SeekGE/OP_IdxGT +** of OP_SeekLE/OP_IdxLT) +** </ul> +** +** The P4 value may be either an integer (P4_INT32) or a pointer to +** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo +** object, then table being opened must be an [index b-tree] where the +** KeyInfo object defines the content and collating +** sequence of that index b-tree. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer +** value, then the table being opened must be a [table b-tree] with a +** number of columns no less than the value of P4. +** +** See also: OpenWrite, ReopenIdx +*/ +/* Opcode: ReopenIdx P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 +** Synopsis: root=P2 iDb=P3 +** +** The ReopenIdx opcode works like OP_OpenRead except that it first +** checks to see if the cursor on P1 is already open on the same +** b-tree and if it is this opcode becomes a no-op. In other words, +** if the cursor is already open, do not reopen it. +** +** The ReopenIdx opcode may only be used with P5==0 or P5==OPFLAG_SEEKEQ +** and with P4 being a P4_KEYINFO object. Furthermore, the P3 value must +** be the same as every other ReopenIdx or OpenRead for the same cursor +** number. +** +** Allowed P5 bits: +** <ul> +** <li> <b>0x02 OPFLAG_SEEKEQ</b>: This cursor will only be used for +** equality lookups (implemented as a pair of opcodes OP_SeekGE/OP_IdxGT +** of OP_SeekLE/OP_IdxLT) +** </ul> +** +** See also: OP_OpenRead, OP_OpenWrite +*/ +/* Opcode: OpenWrite P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 +** Synopsis: root=P2 iDb=P3 +** +** Open a read/write cursor named P1 on the table or index whose root +** page is P2 (or whose root page is held in register P2 if the +** OPFLAG_P2ISREG bit is set in P5 - see below). +** +** The P4 value may be either an integer (P4_INT32) or a pointer to +** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo +** object, then table being opened must be an [index b-tree] where the +** KeyInfo object defines the content and collating +** sequence of that index b-tree. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer +** value, then the table being opened must be a [table b-tree] with a +** number of columns no less than the value of P4. +** +** Allowed P5 bits: +** <ul> +** <li> <b>0x02 OPFLAG_SEEKEQ</b>: This cursor will only be used for +** equality lookups (implemented as a pair of opcodes OP_SeekGE/OP_IdxGT +** of OP_SeekLE/OP_IdxLT) +** <li> <b>0x08 OPFLAG_FORDELETE</b>: This cursor is used only to seek +** and subsequently delete entries in an index btree. This is a +** hint to the storage engine that the storage engine is allowed to +** ignore. The hint is not used by the official SQLite b*tree storage +** engine, but is used by COMDB2. +** <li> <b>0x10 OPFLAG_P2ISREG</b>: Use the content of register P2 +** as the root page, not the value of P2 itself. +** </ul> +** +** This instruction works like OpenRead except that it opens the cursor +** in read/write mode. +** +** See also: OP_OpenRead, OP_ReopenIdx +*/ +case OP_ReopenIdx: { + int nField; + KeyInfo *pKeyInfo; + u32 p2; + int iDb; + int wrFlag; + Btree *pX; + VdbeCursor *pCur; + Db *pDb; + + assert( pOp->p5==0 || pOp->p5==OPFLAG_SEEKEQ ); + assert( pOp->p4type==P4_KEYINFO ); + pCur = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + if( pCur && pCur->pgnoRoot==(u32)pOp->p2 ){ + assert( pCur->iDb==pOp->p3 ); /* Guaranteed by the code generator */ + assert( pCur->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); + sqlite3BtreeClearCursor(pCur->uc.pCursor); + goto open_cursor_set_hints; + } + /* If the cursor is not currently open or is open on a different + ** index, then fall through into OP_OpenRead to force a reopen */ +case OP_OpenRead: +case OP_OpenWrite: + + assert( pOp->opcode==OP_OpenWrite || pOp->p5==0 || pOp->p5==OPFLAG_SEEKEQ ); + assert( p->bIsReader ); + assert( pOp->opcode==OP_OpenRead || pOp->opcode==OP_ReopenIdx + || p->readOnly==0 ); + + if( p->expired==1 ){ + rc = SQLITE_ABORT_ROLLBACK; + goto abort_due_to_error; + } + + nField = 0; + pKeyInfo = 0; + p2 = (u32)pOp->p2; + iDb = pOp->p3; + assert( iDb>=0 && iDb<db->nDb ); + assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, iDb) ); + pDb = &db->aDb[iDb]; + pX = pDb->pBt; + assert( pX!=0 ); + if( pOp->opcode==OP_OpenWrite ){ + assert( OPFLAG_FORDELETE==BTREE_FORDELETE ); + wrFlag = BTREE_WRCSR | (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_FORDELETE); + assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, iDb, 0) ); + if( pDb->pSchema->file_format < p->minWriteFileFormat ){ + p->minWriteFileFormat = pDb->pSchema->file_format; + } + }else{ + wrFlag = 0; + } + if( pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_P2ISREG ){ + assert( p2>0 ); + assert( p2<=(u32)(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); + assert( pOp->opcode==OP_OpenWrite ); + pIn2 = &aMem[p2]; + assert( memIsValid(pIn2) ); + assert( (pIn2->flags & MEM_Int)!=0 ); + sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pIn2); + p2 = (int)pIn2->u.i; + /* The p2 value always comes from a prior OP_CreateBtree opcode and + ** that opcode will always set the p2 value to 2 or more or else fail. + ** If there were a failure, the prepared statement would have halted + ** before reaching this instruction. */ + assert( p2>=2 ); + } + if( pOp->p4type==P4_KEYINFO ){ + pKeyInfo = pOp->p4.pKeyInfo; + assert( pKeyInfo->enc==ENC(db) ); + assert( pKeyInfo->db==db ); + nField = pKeyInfo->nAllField; + }else if( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 ){ + nField = pOp->p4.i; + } + assert( pOp->p1>=0 ); + assert( nField>=0 ); + testcase( nField==0 ); /* Table with INTEGER PRIMARY KEY and nothing else */ + pCur = allocateCursor(p, pOp->p1, nField, CURTYPE_BTREE); + if( pCur==0 ) goto no_mem; + pCur->iDb = iDb; + pCur->nullRow = 1; + pCur->isOrdered = 1; + pCur->pgnoRoot = p2; +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + pCur->wrFlag = wrFlag; +#endif + rc = sqlite3BtreeCursor(pX, p2, wrFlag, pKeyInfo, pCur->uc.pCursor); + pCur->pKeyInfo = pKeyInfo; + /* Set the VdbeCursor.isTable variable. Previous versions of + ** SQLite used to check if the root-page flags were sane at this point + ** and report database corruption if they were not, but this check has + ** since moved into the btree layer. */ + pCur->isTable = pOp->p4type!=P4_KEYINFO; + +open_cursor_set_hints: + assert( OPFLAG_BULKCSR==BTREE_BULKLOAD ); + assert( OPFLAG_SEEKEQ==BTREE_SEEK_EQ ); + testcase( pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_BULKCSR ); + testcase( pOp->p2 & OPFLAG_SEEKEQ ); + sqlite3BtreeCursorHintFlags(pCur->uc.pCursor, + (pOp->p5 & (OPFLAG_BULKCSR|OPFLAG_SEEKEQ))); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: OpenDup P1 P2 * * * +** +** Open a new cursor P1 that points to the same ephemeral table as +** cursor P2. The P2 cursor must have been opened by a prior OP_OpenEphemeral +** opcode. Only ephemeral cursors may be duplicated. +** +** Duplicate ephemeral cursors are used for self-joins of materialized views. +*/ +case OP_OpenDup: { + VdbeCursor *pOrig; /* The original cursor to be duplicated */ + VdbeCursor *pCx; /* The new cursor */ + + pOrig = p->apCsr[pOp->p2]; + assert( pOrig ); + assert( pOrig->isEphemeral ); /* Only ephemeral cursors can be duplicated */ + + pCx = allocateCursor(p, pOp->p1, pOrig->nField, CURTYPE_BTREE); + if( pCx==0 ) goto no_mem; + pCx->nullRow = 1; + pCx->isEphemeral = 1; + pCx->pKeyInfo = pOrig->pKeyInfo; + pCx->isTable = pOrig->isTable; + pCx->pgnoRoot = pOrig->pgnoRoot; + pCx->isOrdered = pOrig->isOrdered; + pCx->ub.pBtx = pOrig->ub.pBtx; + pCx->noReuse = 1; + pOrig->noReuse = 1; + rc = sqlite3BtreeCursor(pCx->ub.pBtx, pCx->pgnoRoot, BTREE_WRCSR, + pCx->pKeyInfo, pCx->uc.pCursor); + /* The sqlite3BtreeCursor() routine can only fail for the first cursor + ** opened for a database. Since there is already an open cursor when this + ** opcode is run, the sqlite3BtreeCursor() cannot fail */ + assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); + break; +} + + +/* Opcode: OpenEphemeral P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 +** Synopsis: nColumn=P2 +** +** Open a new cursor P1 to a transient table. +** The cursor is always opened read/write even if +** the main database is read-only. The ephemeral +** table is deleted automatically when the cursor is closed. +** +** If the cursor P1 is already opened on an ephemeral table, the table +** is cleared (all content is erased). +** +** P2 is the number of columns in the ephemeral table. +** The cursor points to a BTree table if P4==0 and to a BTree index +** if P4 is not 0. If P4 is not NULL, it points to a KeyInfo structure +** that defines the format of keys in the index. +** +** The P5 parameter can be a mask of the BTREE_* flags defined +** in btree.h. These flags control aspects of the operation of +** the btree. The BTREE_OMIT_JOURNAL and BTREE_SINGLE flags are +** added automatically. +** +** If P3 is positive, then reg[P3] is modified slightly so that it +** can be used as zero-length data for OP_Insert. This is an optimization +** that avoids an extra OP_Blob opcode to initialize that register. +*/ +/* Opcode: OpenAutoindex P1 P2 * P4 * +** Synopsis: nColumn=P2 +** +** This opcode works the same as OP_OpenEphemeral. It has a +** different name to distinguish its use. Tables created using +** by this opcode will be used for automatically created transient +** indices in joins. +*/ +case OP_OpenAutoindex: +case OP_OpenEphemeral: { + VdbeCursor *pCx; + KeyInfo *pKeyInfo; + + static const int vfsFlags = + SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE | + SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE | + SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE | + SQLITE_OPEN_DELETEONCLOSE | + SQLITE_OPEN_TRANSIENT_DB; + assert( pOp->p1>=0 ); + assert( pOp->p2>=0 ); + if( pOp->p3>0 ){ + /* Make register reg[P3] into a value that can be used as the data + ** form sqlite3BtreeInsert() where the length of the data is zero. */ + assert( pOp->p2==0 ); /* Only used when number of columns is zero */ + assert( pOp->opcode==OP_OpenEphemeral ); + assert( aMem[pOp->p3].flags & MEM_Null ); + aMem[pOp->p3].n = 0; + aMem[pOp->p3].z = ""; + } + pCx = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + if( pCx && !pCx->noReuse && ALWAYS(pOp->p2<=pCx->nField) ){ + /* If the ephermeral table is already open and has no duplicates from + ** OP_OpenDup, then erase all existing content so that the table is + ** empty again, rather than creating a new table. */ + assert( pCx->isEphemeral ); + pCx->seqCount = 0; + pCx->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; + rc = sqlite3BtreeClearTable(pCx->ub.pBtx, pCx->pgnoRoot, 0); + }else{ + pCx = allocateCursor(p, pOp->p1, pOp->p2, CURTYPE_BTREE); + if( pCx==0 ) goto no_mem; + pCx->isEphemeral = 1; + rc = sqlite3BtreeOpen(db->pVfs, 0, db, &pCx->ub.pBtx, + BTREE_OMIT_JOURNAL | BTREE_SINGLE | pOp->p5, + vfsFlags); + if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ + rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(pCx->ub.pBtx, 1, 0); + if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ + /* If a transient index is required, create it by calling + ** sqlite3BtreeCreateTable() with the BTREE_BLOBKEY flag before + ** opening it. If a transient table is required, just use the + ** automatically created table with root-page 1 (an BLOB_INTKEY table). + */ + if( (pCx->pKeyInfo = pKeyInfo = pOp->p4.pKeyInfo)!=0 ){ + assert( pOp->p4type==P4_KEYINFO ); + rc = sqlite3BtreeCreateTable(pCx->ub.pBtx, &pCx->pgnoRoot, + BTREE_BLOBKEY | pOp->p5); + if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ + assert( pCx->pgnoRoot==SCHEMA_ROOT+1 ); + assert( pKeyInfo->db==db ); + assert( pKeyInfo->enc==ENC(db) ); + rc = sqlite3BtreeCursor(pCx->ub.pBtx, pCx->pgnoRoot, BTREE_WRCSR, + pKeyInfo, pCx->uc.pCursor); + } + pCx->isTable = 0; + }else{ + pCx->pgnoRoot = SCHEMA_ROOT; + rc = sqlite3BtreeCursor(pCx->ub.pBtx, SCHEMA_ROOT, BTREE_WRCSR, + 0, pCx->uc.pCursor); + pCx->isTable = 1; + } + } + pCx->isOrdered = (pOp->p5!=BTREE_UNORDERED); + if( rc ){ + sqlite3BtreeClose(pCx->ub.pBtx); + } + } + } + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + pCx->nullRow = 1; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: SorterOpen P1 P2 P3 P4 * +** +** This opcode works like OP_OpenEphemeral except that it opens +** a transient index that is specifically designed to sort large +** tables using an external merge-sort algorithm. +** +** If argument P3 is non-zero, then it indicates that the sorter may +** assume that a stable sort considering the first P3 fields of each +** key is sufficient to produce the required results. +*/ +case OP_SorterOpen: { + VdbeCursor *pCx; + + assert( pOp->p1>=0 ); + assert( pOp->p2>=0 ); + pCx = allocateCursor(p, pOp->p1, pOp->p2, CURTYPE_SORTER); + if( pCx==0 ) goto no_mem; + pCx->pKeyInfo = pOp->p4.pKeyInfo; + assert( pCx->pKeyInfo->db==db ); + assert( pCx->pKeyInfo->enc==ENC(db) ); + rc = sqlite3VdbeSorterInit(db, pOp->p3, pCx); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: SequenceTest P1 P2 * * * +** Synopsis: if( cursor[P1].ctr++ ) pc = P2 +** +** P1 is a sorter cursor. If the sequence counter is currently zero, jump +** to P2. Regardless of whether or not the jump is taken, increment the +** the sequence value. +*/ +case OP_SequenceTest: { + VdbeCursor *pC; + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( isSorter(pC) ); + if( (pC->seqCount++)==0 ){ + goto jump_to_p2; + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: OpenPseudo P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: P3 columns in r[P2] +** +** Open a new cursor that points to a fake table that contains a single +** row of data. The content of that one row is the content of memory +** register P2. In other words, cursor P1 becomes an alias for the +** MEM_Blob content contained in register P2. +** +** A pseudo-table created by this opcode is used to hold a single +** row output from the sorter so that the row can be decomposed into +** individual columns using the OP_Column opcode. The OP_Column opcode +** is the only cursor opcode that works with a pseudo-table. +** +** P3 is the number of fields in the records that will be stored by +** the pseudo-table. +*/ +case OP_OpenPseudo: { + VdbeCursor *pCx; + + assert( pOp->p1>=0 ); + assert( pOp->p3>=0 ); + pCx = allocateCursor(p, pOp->p1, pOp->p3, CURTYPE_PSEUDO); + if( pCx==0 ) goto no_mem; + pCx->nullRow = 1; + pCx->seekResult = pOp->p2; + pCx->isTable = 1; + /* Give this pseudo-cursor a fake BtCursor pointer so that pCx + ** can be safely passed to sqlite3VdbeCursorMoveto(). This avoids a test + ** for pCx->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE inside of sqlite3VdbeCursorMoveto() + ** which is a performance optimization */ + pCx->uc.pCursor = sqlite3BtreeFakeValidCursor(); + assert( pOp->p5==0 ); + break; +} + +/* Opcode: Close P1 * * * * +** +** Close a cursor previously opened as P1. If P1 is not +** currently open, this instruction is a no-op. +*/ +case OP_Close: { + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + sqlite3VdbeFreeCursor(p, p->apCsr[pOp->p1]); + p->apCsr[pOp->p1] = 0; + break; +} + +#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_USED_MASK +/* Opcode: ColumnsUsed P1 * * P4 * +** +** This opcode (which only exists if SQLite was compiled with +** SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_USED_MASK) identifies which columns of the +** table or index for cursor P1 are used. P4 is a 64-bit integer +** (P4_INT64) in which the first 63 bits are one for each of the +** first 63 columns of the table or index that are actually used +** by the cursor. The high-order bit is set if any column after +** the 64th is used. +*/ +case OP_ColumnsUsed: { + VdbeCursor *pC; + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); + pC->maskUsed = *(u64*)pOp->p4.pI64; + break; +} +#endif + +/* Opcode: SeekGE P1 P2 P3 P4 * +** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] +** +** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), +** use the value in register P3 as the key. If cursor P1 refers +** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers +** that are used as an unpacked index key. +** +** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that +** is greater than or equal to the key value. If there are no records +** greater than or equal to the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2. +** +** If the cursor P1 was opened using the OPFLAG_SEEKEQ flag, then this +** opcode will either land on a record that exactly matches the key, or +** else it will cause a jump to P2. When the cursor is OPFLAG_SEEKEQ, +** this opcode must be followed by an IdxLE opcode with the same arguments. +** The IdxGT opcode will be skipped if this opcode succeeds, but the +** IdxGT opcode will be used on subsequent loop iterations. The +** OPFLAG_SEEKEQ flags is a hint to the btree layer to say that this +** is an equality search. +** +** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in forward order, +** from the beginning toward the end. In other words, the cursor is +** configured to use Next, not Prev. +** +** See also: Found, NotFound, SeekLt, SeekGt, SeekLe +*/ +/* Opcode: SeekGT P1 P2 P3 P4 * +** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] +** +** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), +** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers +** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers +** that are used as an unpacked index key. +** +** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that +** is greater than the key value. If there are no records greater than +** the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2. +** +** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in forward order, +** from the beginning toward the end. In other words, the cursor is +** configured to use Next, not Prev. +** +** See also: Found, NotFound, SeekLt, SeekGe, SeekLe +*/ +/* Opcode: SeekLT P1 P2 P3 P4 * +** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] +** +** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), +** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers +** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers +** that are used as an unpacked index key. +** +** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that +** is less than the key value. If there are no records less than +** the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2. +** +** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in reverse order, +** from the end toward the beginning. In other words, the cursor is +** configured to use Prev, not Next. +** +** See also: Found, NotFound, SeekGt, SeekGe, SeekLe +*/ +/* Opcode: SeekLE P1 P2 P3 P4 * +** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] +** +** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), +** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers +** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers +** that are used as an unpacked index key. +** +** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that +** is less than or equal to the key value. If there are no records +** less than or equal to the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2. +** +** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in reverse order, +** from the end toward the beginning. In other words, the cursor is +** configured to use Prev, not Next. +** +** If the cursor P1 was opened using the OPFLAG_SEEKEQ flag, then this +** opcode will either land on a record that exactly matches the key, or +** else it will cause a jump to P2. When the cursor is OPFLAG_SEEKEQ, +** this opcode must be followed by an IdxLE opcode with the same arguments. +** The IdxGE opcode will be skipped if this opcode succeeds, but the +** IdxGE opcode will be used on subsequent loop iterations. The +** OPFLAG_SEEKEQ flags is a hint to the btree layer to say that this +** is an equality search. +** +** See also: Found, NotFound, SeekGt, SeekGe, SeekLt +*/ +case OP_SeekLT: /* jump, in3, group */ +case OP_SeekLE: /* jump, in3, group */ +case OP_SeekGE: /* jump, in3, group */ +case OP_SeekGT: { /* jump, in3, group */ + int res; /* Comparison result */ + int oc; /* Opcode */ + VdbeCursor *pC; /* The cursor to seek */ + UnpackedRecord r; /* The key to seek for */ + int nField; /* Number of columns or fields in the key */ + i64 iKey; /* The rowid we are to seek to */ + int eqOnly; /* Only interested in == results */ + + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + assert( pOp->p2!=0 ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( pC!=0 ); + assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); + assert( OP_SeekLE == OP_SeekLT+1 ); + assert( OP_SeekGE == OP_SeekLT+2 ); + assert( OP_SeekGT == OP_SeekLT+3 ); + assert( pC->isOrdered ); + assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); + oc = pOp->opcode; + eqOnly = 0; + pC->nullRow = 0; +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + pC->seekOp = pOp->opcode; +#endif + + pC->deferredMoveto = 0; + pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; + if( pC->isTable ){ + u16 flags3, newType; + /* The OPFLAG_SEEKEQ/BTREE_SEEK_EQ flag is only set on index cursors */ + assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorHasHint(pC->uc.pCursor, BTREE_SEEK_EQ)==0 + || CORRUPT_DB ); + + /* The input value in P3 might be of any type: integer, real, string, + ** blob, or NULL. But it needs to be an integer before we can do + ** the seek, so convert it. */ + pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + flags3 = pIn3->flags; + if( (flags3 & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real|MEM_IntReal|MEM_Str))==MEM_Str ){ + applyNumericAffinity(pIn3, 0); + } + iKey = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn3); /* Get the integer key value */ + newType = pIn3->flags; /* Record the type after applying numeric affinity */ + pIn3->flags = flags3; /* But convert the type back to its original */ + + /* If the P3 value could not be converted into an integer without + ** loss of information, then special processing is required... */ + if( (newType & (MEM_Int|MEM_IntReal))==0 ){ + int c; + if( (newType & MEM_Real)==0 ){ + if( (newType & MEM_Null) || oc>=OP_SeekGE ){ + VdbeBranchTaken(1,2); + goto jump_to_p2; + }else{ + rc = sqlite3BtreeLast(pC->uc.pCursor, &res); + if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error; + goto seek_not_found; + } + } + c = sqlite3IntFloatCompare(iKey, pIn3->u.r); + + /* If the approximation iKey is larger than the actual real search + ** term, substitute >= for > and < for <=. e.g. if the search term + ** is 4.9 and the integer approximation 5: + ** + ** (x > 4.9) -> (x >= 5) + ** (x <= 4.9) -> (x < 5) + */ + if( c>0 ){ + assert( OP_SeekGE==(OP_SeekGT-1) ); + assert( OP_SeekLT==(OP_SeekLE-1) ); + assert( (OP_SeekLE & 0x0001)==(OP_SeekGT & 0x0001) ); + if( (oc & 0x0001)==(OP_SeekGT & 0x0001) ) oc--; + } + + /* If the approximation iKey is smaller than the actual real search + ** term, substitute <= for < and > for >=. */ + else if( c<0 ){ + assert( OP_SeekLE==(OP_SeekLT+1) ); + assert( OP_SeekGT==(OP_SeekGE+1) ); + assert( (OP_SeekLT & 0x0001)==(OP_SeekGE & 0x0001) ); + if( (oc & 0x0001)==(OP_SeekLT & 0x0001) ) oc++; + } + } + rc = sqlite3BtreeTableMoveto(pC->uc.pCursor, (u64)iKey, 0, &res); + pC->movetoTarget = iKey; /* Used by OP_Delete */ + if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ + goto abort_due_to_error; + } + }else{ + /* For a cursor with the OPFLAG_SEEKEQ/BTREE_SEEK_EQ hint, only the + ** OP_SeekGE and OP_SeekLE opcodes are allowed, and these must be + ** immediately followed by an OP_IdxGT or OP_IdxLT opcode, respectively, + ** with the same key. + */ + if( sqlite3BtreeCursorHasHint(pC->uc.pCursor, BTREE_SEEK_EQ) ){ + eqOnly = 1; + assert( pOp->opcode==OP_SeekGE || pOp->opcode==OP_SeekLE ); + assert( pOp[1].opcode==OP_IdxLT || pOp[1].opcode==OP_IdxGT ); + assert( pOp->opcode==OP_SeekGE || pOp[1].opcode==OP_IdxLT ); + assert( pOp->opcode==OP_SeekLE || pOp[1].opcode==OP_IdxGT ); + assert( pOp[1].p1==pOp[0].p1 ); + assert( pOp[1].p2==pOp[0].p2 ); + assert( pOp[1].p3==pOp[0].p3 ); + assert( pOp[1].p4.i==pOp[0].p4.i ); + } + + nField = pOp->p4.i; + assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 ); + assert( nField>0 ); + r.pKeyInfo = pC->pKeyInfo; + r.nField = (u16)nField; + + /* The next line of code computes as follows, only faster: + ** if( oc==OP_SeekGT || oc==OP_SeekLE ){ + ** r.default_rc = -1; + ** }else{ + ** r.default_rc = +1; + ** } + */ + r.default_rc = ((1 & (oc - OP_SeekLT)) ? -1 : +1); + assert( oc!=OP_SeekGT || r.default_rc==-1 ); + assert( oc!=OP_SeekLE || r.default_rc==-1 ); + assert( oc!=OP_SeekGE || r.default_rc==+1 ); + assert( oc!=OP_SeekLT || r.default_rc==+1 ); + + r.aMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + { + int i; + for(i=0; i<r.nField; i++){ + assert( memIsValid(&r.aMem[i]) ); + if( i>0 ) REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3+i, &r.aMem[i]); + } + } +#endif + r.eqSeen = 0; + rc = sqlite3BtreeIndexMoveto(pC->uc.pCursor, &r, &res); + if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ + goto abort_due_to_error; + } + if( eqOnly && r.eqSeen==0 ){ + assert( res!=0 ); + goto seek_not_found; + } + } +#ifdef SQLITE_TEST + sqlite3_search_count++; +#endif + if( oc>=OP_SeekGE ){ assert( oc==OP_SeekGE || oc==OP_SeekGT ); + if( res<0 || (res==0 && oc==OP_SeekGT) ){ + res = 0; + rc = sqlite3BtreeNext(pC->uc.pCursor, 0); + if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ + if( rc==SQLITE_DONE ){ + rc = SQLITE_OK; + res = 1; + }else{ + goto abort_due_to_error; + } + } + }else{ + res = 0; + } + }else{ + assert( oc==OP_SeekLT || oc==OP_SeekLE ); + if( res>0 || (res==0 && oc==OP_SeekLT) ){ + res = 0; + rc = sqlite3BtreePrevious(pC->uc.pCursor, 0); + if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ + if( rc==SQLITE_DONE ){ + rc = SQLITE_OK; + res = 1; + }else{ + goto abort_due_to_error; + } + } + }else{ + /* res might be negative because the table is empty. Check to + ** see if this is the case. + */ + res = sqlite3BtreeEof(pC->uc.pCursor); + } + } +seek_not_found: + assert( pOp->p2>0 ); + VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0,2); + if( res ){ + goto jump_to_p2; + }else if( eqOnly ){ + assert( pOp[1].opcode==OP_IdxLT || pOp[1].opcode==OP_IdxGT ); + pOp++; /* Skip the OP_IdxLt or OP_IdxGT that follows */ + } + break; +} + + +/* Opcode: SeekScan P1 P2 * * P5 +** Synopsis: Scan-ahead up to P1 rows +** +** This opcode is a prefix opcode to OP_SeekGE. In other words, this +** opcode must be immediately followed by OP_SeekGE. This constraint is +** checked by assert() statements. +** +** This opcode uses the P1 through P4 operands of the subsequent +** OP_SeekGE. In the text that follows, the operands of the subsequent +** OP_SeekGE opcode are denoted as SeekOP.P1 through SeekOP.P4. Only +** the P1, P2 and P5 operands of this opcode are also used, and are called +** This.P1, This.P2 and This.P5. +** +** This opcode helps to optimize IN operators on a multi-column index +** where the IN operator is on the later terms of the index by avoiding +** unnecessary seeks on the btree, substituting steps to the next row +** of the b-tree instead. A correct answer is obtained if this opcode +** is omitted or is a no-op. +** +** The SeekGE.P3 and SeekGE.P4 operands identify an unpacked key which +** is the desired entry that we want the cursor SeekGE.P1 to be pointing +** to. Call this SeekGE.P3/P4 row the "target". +** +** If the SeekGE.P1 cursor is not currently pointing to a valid row, +** then this opcode is a no-op and control passes through into the OP_SeekGE. +** +** If the SeekGE.P1 cursor is pointing to a valid row, then that row +** might be the target row, or it might be near and slightly before the +** target row, or it might be after the target row. If the cursor is +** currently before the target row, then this opcode attempts to position +** the cursor on or after the target row by invoking sqlite3BtreeStep() +** on the cursor between 1 and This.P1 times. +** +** The This.P5 parameter is a flag that indicates what to do if the +** cursor ends up pointing at a valid row that is past the target +** row. If This.P5 is false (0) then a jump is made to SeekGE.P2. If +** This.P5 is true (non-zero) then a jump is made to This.P2. The P5==0 +** case occurs when there are no inequality constraints to the right of +** the IN constraing. The jump to SeekGE.P2 ends the loop. The P5!=0 case +** occurs when there are inequality constraints to the right of the IN +** operator. In that case, the This.P2 will point either directly to or +** to setup code prior to the OP_IdxGT or OP_IdxGE opcode that checks for +** loop terminate. +** +** Possible outcomes from this opcode:<ol> +** +** <li> If the cursor is initally not pointed to any valid row, then +** fall through into the subsequent OP_SeekGE opcode. +** +** <li> If the cursor is left pointing to a row that is before the target +** row, even after making as many as This.P1 calls to +** sqlite3BtreeNext(), then also fall through into OP_SeekGE. +** +** <li> If the cursor is left pointing at the target row, either because it +** was at the target row to begin with or because one or more +** sqlite3BtreeNext() calls moved the cursor to the target row, +** then jump to This.P2.., +** +** <li> If the cursor started out before the target row and a call to +** to sqlite3BtreeNext() moved the cursor off the end of the index +** (indicating that the target row definitely does not exist in the +** btree) then jump to SeekGE.P2, ending the loop. +** +** <li> If the cursor ends up on a valid row that is past the target row +** (indicating that the target row does not exist in the btree) then +** jump to SeekOP.P2 if This.P5==0 or to This.P2 if This.P5>0. +** </ol> +*/ +case OP_SeekScan: { + VdbeCursor *pC; + int res; + int nStep; + UnpackedRecord r; + + assert( pOp[1].opcode==OP_SeekGE ); + + /* If pOp->p5 is clear, then pOp->p2 points to the first instruction past the + ** OP_IdxGT that follows the OP_SeekGE. Otherwise, it points to the first + ** opcode past the OP_SeekGE itself. */ + assert( pOp->p2>=(int)(pOp-aOp)+2 ); +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + if( pOp->p5==0 ){ + /* There are no inequality constraints following the IN constraint. */ + assert( pOp[1].p1==aOp[pOp->p2-1].p1 ); + assert( pOp[1].p2==aOp[pOp->p2-1].p2 ); + assert( pOp[1].p3==aOp[pOp->p2-1].p3 ); + assert( aOp[pOp->p2-1].opcode==OP_IdxGT + || aOp[pOp->p2-1].opcode==OP_IdxGE ); + testcase( aOp[pOp->p2-1].opcode==OP_IdxGE ); + }else{ + /* There are inequality constraints. */ + assert( pOp->p2==(int)(pOp-aOp)+2 ); + assert( aOp[pOp->p2-1].opcode==OP_SeekGE ); + } +#endif + + assert( pOp->p1>0 ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp[1].p1]; + assert( pC!=0 ); + assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); + assert( !pC->isTable ); + if( !sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValidNN(pC->uc.pCursor) ){ +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ + printf("... cursor not valid - fall through\n"); + } +#endif + break; + } + nStep = pOp->p1; + assert( nStep>=1 ); + r.pKeyInfo = pC->pKeyInfo; + r.nField = (u16)pOp[1].p4.i; + r.default_rc = 0; + r.aMem = &aMem[pOp[1].p3]; +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + { + int i; + for(i=0; i<r.nField; i++){ + assert( memIsValid(&r.aMem[i]) ); + REGISTER_TRACE(pOp[1].p3+i, &aMem[pOp[1].p3+i]); + } + } +#endif + res = 0; /* Not needed. Only used to silence a warning. */ + while(1){ + rc = sqlite3VdbeIdxKeyCompare(db, pC, &r, &res); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + if( res>0 && pOp->p5==0 ){ + seekscan_search_fail: + /* Jump to SeekGE.P2, ending the loop */ +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ + printf("... %d steps and then skip\n", pOp->p1 - nStep); + } +#endif + VdbeBranchTaken(1,3); + pOp++; + goto jump_to_p2; + } + if( res>=0 ){ + /* Jump to This.P2, bypassing the OP_SeekGE opcode */ +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ + printf("... %d steps and then success\n", pOp->p1 - nStep); + } +#endif + VdbeBranchTaken(2,3); + goto jump_to_p2; + break; + } + if( nStep<=0 ){ +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ + printf("... fall through after %d steps\n", pOp->p1); + } +#endif + VdbeBranchTaken(0,3); + break; + } + nStep--; + rc = sqlite3BtreeNext(pC->uc.pCursor, 0); + if( rc ){ + if( rc==SQLITE_DONE ){ + rc = SQLITE_OK; + goto seekscan_search_fail; + }else{ + goto abort_due_to_error; + } + } + } + + break; +} + + +/* Opcode: SeekHit P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: set P2<=seekHit<=P3 +** +** Increase or decrease the seekHit value for cursor P1, if necessary, +** so that it is no less than P2 and no greater than P3. +** +** The seekHit integer represents the maximum of terms in an index for which +** there is known to be at least one match. If the seekHit value is smaller +** than the total number of equality terms in an index lookup, then the +** OP_IfNoHope opcode might run to see if the IN loop can be abandoned +** early, thus saving work. This is part of the IN-early-out optimization. +** +** P1 must be a valid b-tree cursor. +*/ +case OP_SeekHit: { + VdbeCursor *pC; + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( pC!=0 ); + assert( pOp->p3>=pOp->p2 ); + if( pC->seekHit<pOp->p2 ){ +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ + printf("seekHit changes from %d to %d\n", pC->seekHit, pOp->p2); + } +#endif + pC->seekHit = pOp->p2; + }else if( pC->seekHit>pOp->p3 ){ +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ + printf("seekHit changes from %d to %d\n", pC->seekHit, pOp->p3); + } +#endif + pC->seekHit = pOp->p3; + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: IfNotOpen P1 P2 * * * +** Synopsis: if( !csr[P1] ) goto P2 +** +** If cursor P1 is not open or if P1 is set to a NULL row using the +** OP_NullRow opcode, then jump to instruction P2. Otherwise, fall through. +*/ +case OP_IfNotOpen: { /* jump */ + VdbeCursor *pCur; + + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + pCur = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + VdbeBranchTaken(pCur==0 || pCur->nullRow, 2); + if( pCur==0 || pCur->nullRow ){ + goto jump_to_p2_and_check_for_interrupt; + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: Found P1 P2 P3 P4 * +** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] +** +** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord. If +** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked +** record. +** +** Cursor P1 is on an index btree. If the record identified by P3 and P4 +** is a prefix of any entry in P1 then a jump is made to P2 and +** P1 is left pointing at the matching entry. +** +** This operation leaves the cursor in a state where it can be +** advanced in the forward direction. The Next instruction will work, +** but not the Prev instruction. +** +** See also: NotFound, NoConflict, NotExists. SeekGe +*/ +/* Opcode: NotFound P1 P2 P3 P4 * +** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] +** +** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord. If +** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked +** record. +** +** Cursor P1 is on an index btree. If the record identified by P3 and P4 +** is not the prefix of any entry in P1 then a jump is made to P2. If P1 +** does contain an entry whose prefix matches the P3/P4 record then control +** falls through to the next instruction and P1 is left pointing at the +** matching entry. +** +** This operation leaves the cursor in a state where it cannot be +** advanced in either direction. In other words, the Next and Prev +** opcodes do not work after this operation. +** +** See also: Found, NotExists, NoConflict, IfNoHope +*/ +/* Opcode: IfNoHope P1 P2 P3 P4 * +** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] +** +** Register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked +** record. Cursor P1 is an index btree. P2 is a jump destination. +** In other words, the operands to this opcode are the same as the +** operands to OP_NotFound and OP_IdxGT. +** +** This opcode is an optimization attempt only. If this opcode always +** falls through, the correct answer is still obtained, but extra works +** is performed. +** +** A value of N in the seekHit flag of cursor P1 means that there exists +** a key P3:N that will match some record in the index. We want to know +** if it is possible for a record P3:P4 to match some record in the +** index. If it is not possible, we can skips some work. So if seekHit +** is less than P4, attempt to find out if a match is possible by running +** OP_NotFound. +** +** This opcode is used in IN clause processing for a multi-column key. +** If an IN clause is attached to an element of the key other than the +** left-most element, and if there are no matches on the most recent +** seek over the whole key, then it might be that one of the key element +** to the left is prohibiting a match, and hence there is "no hope" of +** any match regardless of how many IN clause elements are checked. +** In such a case, we abandon the IN clause search early, using this +** opcode. The opcode name comes from the fact that the +** jump is taken if there is "no hope" of achieving a match. +** +** See also: NotFound, SeekHit +*/ +/* Opcode: NoConflict P1 P2 P3 P4 * +** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] +** +** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord. If +** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked +** record. +** +** Cursor P1 is on an index btree. If the record identified by P3 and P4 +** contains any NULL value, jump immediately to P2. If all terms of the +** record are not-NULL then a check is done to determine if any row in the +** P1 index btree has a matching key prefix. If there are no matches, jump +** immediately to P2. If there is a match, fall through and leave the P1 +** cursor pointing to the matching row. +** +** This opcode is similar to OP_NotFound with the exceptions that the +** branch is always taken if any part of the search key input is NULL. +** +** This operation leaves the cursor in a state where it cannot be +** advanced in either direction. In other words, the Next and Prev +** opcodes do not work after this operation. +** +** See also: NotFound, Found, NotExists +*/ +case OP_IfNoHope: { /* jump, in3 */ + VdbeCursor *pC; + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( pC!=0 ); +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ + printf("seekHit is %d\n", pC->seekHit); + } +#endif + if( pC->seekHit>=pOp->p4.i ) break; + /* Fall through into OP_NotFound */ + /* no break */ deliberate_fall_through +} +case OP_NoConflict: /* jump, in3 */ +case OP_NotFound: /* jump, in3 */ +case OP_Found: { /* jump, in3 */ + int alreadyExists; + int ii; + VdbeCursor *pC; + UnpackedRecord *pIdxKey; + UnpackedRecord r; + +#ifdef SQLITE_TEST + if( pOp->opcode!=OP_NoConflict ) sqlite3_found_count++; +#endif + + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( pC!=0 ); +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + pC->seekOp = pOp->opcode; +#endif + r.aMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); + assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); + assert( pC->isTable==0 ); + r.nField = (u16)pOp->p4.i; + if( r.nField>0 ){ + /* Key values in an array of registers */ + r.pKeyInfo = pC->pKeyInfo; + r.default_rc = 0; +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + for(ii=0; ii<r.nField; ii++){ + assert( memIsValid(&r.aMem[ii]) ); + assert( (r.aMem[ii].flags & MEM_Zero)==0 || r.aMem[ii].n==0 ); + if( ii ) REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3+ii, &r.aMem[ii]); + } +#endif + rc = sqlite3BtreeIndexMoveto(pC->uc.pCursor, &r, &pC->seekResult); + }else{ + /* Composite key generated by OP_MakeRecord */ + assert( r.aMem->flags & MEM_Blob ); + assert( pOp->opcode!=OP_NoConflict ); + rc = ExpandBlob(r.aMem); + assert( rc==SQLITE_OK || rc==SQLITE_NOMEM ); + if( rc ) goto no_mem; + pIdxKey = sqlite3VdbeAllocUnpackedRecord(pC->pKeyInfo); + if( pIdxKey==0 ) goto no_mem; + sqlite3VdbeRecordUnpack(pC->pKeyInfo, r.aMem->n, r.aMem->z, pIdxKey); + pIdxKey->default_rc = 0; + rc = sqlite3BtreeIndexMoveto(pC->uc.pCursor, pIdxKey, &pC->seekResult); + sqlite3DbFreeNN(db, pIdxKey); + } + if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ + goto abort_due_to_error; + } + alreadyExists = (pC->seekResult==0); + pC->nullRow = 1-alreadyExists; + pC->deferredMoveto = 0; + pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; + if( pOp->opcode==OP_Found ){ + VdbeBranchTaken(alreadyExists!=0,2); + if( alreadyExists ) goto jump_to_p2; + }else{ + if( !alreadyExists ){ + VdbeBranchTaken(1,2); + goto jump_to_p2; + } + if( pOp->opcode==OP_NoConflict ){ + /* For the OP_NoConflict opcode, take the jump if any of the + ** input fields are NULL, since any key with a NULL will not + ** conflict */ + for(ii=0; ii<r.nField; ii++){ + if( r.aMem[ii].flags & MEM_Null ){ + VdbeBranchTaken(1,2); + goto jump_to_p2; + } + } + } + VdbeBranchTaken(0,2); + if( pOp->opcode==OP_IfNoHope ){ + pC->seekHit = pOp->p4.i; + } + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: SeekRowid P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: intkey=r[P3] +** +** P1 is the index of a cursor open on an SQL table btree (with integer +** keys). If register P3 does not contain an integer or if P1 does not +** contain a record with rowid P3 then jump immediately to P2. +** Or, if P2 is 0, raise an SQLITE_CORRUPT error. If P1 does contain +** a record with rowid P3 then +** leave the cursor pointing at that record and fall through to the next +** instruction. +** +** The OP_NotExists opcode performs the same operation, but with OP_NotExists +** the P3 register must be guaranteed to contain an integer value. With this +** opcode, register P3 might not contain an integer. +** +** The OP_NotFound opcode performs the same operation on index btrees +** (with arbitrary multi-value keys). +** +** This opcode leaves the cursor in a state where it cannot be advanced +** in either direction. In other words, the Next and Prev opcodes will +** not work following this opcode. +** +** See also: Found, NotFound, NoConflict, SeekRowid +*/ +/* Opcode: NotExists P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: intkey=r[P3] +** +** P1 is the index of a cursor open on an SQL table btree (with integer +** keys). P3 is an integer rowid. If P1 does not contain a record with +** rowid P3 then jump immediately to P2. Or, if P2 is 0, raise an +** SQLITE_CORRUPT error. If P1 does contain a record with rowid P3 then +** leave the cursor pointing at that record and fall through to the next +** instruction. +** +** The OP_SeekRowid opcode performs the same operation but also allows the +** P3 register to contain a non-integer value, in which case the jump is +** always taken. This opcode requires that P3 always contain an integer. +** +** The OP_NotFound opcode performs the same operation on index btrees +** (with arbitrary multi-value keys). +** +** This opcode leaves the cursor in a state where it cannot be advanced +** in either direction. In other words, the Next and Prev opcodes will +** not work following this opcode. +** +** See also: Found, NotFound, NoConflict, SeekRowid +*/ +case OP_SeekRowid: { /* jump, in3 */ + VdbeCursor *pC; + BtCursor *pCrsr; + int res; + u64 iKey; + + pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + testcase( pIn3->flags & MEM_Int ); + testcase( pIn3->flags & MEM_IntReal ); + testcase( pIn3->flags & MEM_Real ); + testcase( (pIn3->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Int))==MEM_Str ); + if( (pIn3->flags & (MEM_Int|MEM_IntReal))==0 ){ + /* If pIn3->u.i does not contain an integer, compute iKey as the + ** integer value of pIn3. Jump to P2 if pIn3 cannot be converted + ** into an integer without loss of information. Take care to avoid + ** changing the datatype of pIn3, however, as it is used by other + ** parts of the prepared statement. */ + Mem x = pIn3[0]; + applyAffinity(&x, SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC, encoding); + if( (x.flags & MEM_Int)==0 ) goto jump_to_p2; + iKey = x.u.i; + goto notExistsWithKey; + } + /* Fall through into OP_NotExists */ + /* no break */ deliberate_fall_through +case OP_NotExists: /* jump, in3 */ + pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + assert( (pIn3->flags & MEM_Int)!=0 || pOp->opcode==OP_SeekRowid ); + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + iKey = pIn3->u.i; +notExistsWithKey: + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( pC!=0 ); +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + if( pOp->opcode==OP_SeekRowid ) pC->seekOp = OP_SeekRowid; +#endif + assert( pC->isTable ); + assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); + pCrsr = pC->uc.pCursor; + assert( pCrsr!=0 ); + res = 0; + rc = sqlite3BtreeTableMoveto(pCrsr, iKey, 0, &res); + assert( rc==SQLITE_OK || res==0 ); + pC->movetoTarget = iKey; /* Used by OP_Delete */ + pC->nullRow = 0; + pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; + pC->deferredMoveto = 0; + VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0,2); + pC->seekResult = res; + if( res!=0 ){ + assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); + if( pOp->p2==0 ){ + rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; + }else{ + goto jump_to_p2; + } + } + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: Sequence P1 P2 * * * +** Synopsis: r[P2]=cursor[P1].ctr++ +** +** Find the next available sequence number for cursor P1. +** Write the sequence number into register P2. +** The sequence number on the cursor is incremented after this +** instruction. +*/ +case OP_Sequence: { /* out2 */ + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + assert( p->apCsr[pOp->p1]!=0 ); + assert( p->apCsr[pOp->p1]->eCurType!=CURTYPE_VTAB ); + pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); + pOut->u.i = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]->seqCount++; + break; +} + + +/* Opcode: NewRowid P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: r[P2]=rowid +** +** Get a new integer record number (a.k.a "rowid") used as the key to a table. +** The record number is not previously used as a key in the database +** table that cursor P1 points to. The new record number is written +** written to register P2. +** +** If P3>0 then P3 is a register in the root frame of this VDBE that holds +** the largest previously generated record number. No new record numbers are +** allowed to be less than this value. When this value reaches its maximum, +** an SQLITE_FULL error is generated. The P3 register is updated with the ' +** generated record number. This P3 mechanism is used to help implement the +** AUTOINCREMENT feature. +*/ +case OP_NewRowid: { /* out2 */ + i64 v; /* The new rowid */ + VdbeCursor *pC; /* Cursor of table to get the new rowid */ + int res; /* Result of an sqlite3BtreeLast() */ + int cnt; /* Counter to limit the number of searches */ +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINCREMENT + Mem *pMem; /* Register holding largest rowid for AUTOINCREMENT */ + VdbeFrame *pFrame; /* Root frame of VDBE */ +#endif + + v = 0; + res = 0; + pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( pC!=0 ); + assert( pC->isTable ); + assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); + assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); + { + /* The next rowid or record number (different terms for the same + ** thing) is obtained in a two-step algorithm. + ** + ** First we attempt to find the largest existing rowid and add one + ** to that. But if the largest existing rowid is already the maximum + ** positive integer, we have to fall through to the second + ** probabilistic algorithm + ** + ** The second algorithm is to select a rowid at random and see if + ** it already exists in the table. If it does not exist, we have + ** succeeded. If the random rowid does exist, we select a new one + ** and try again, up to 100 times. + */ + assert( pC->isTable ); + +#ifdef SQLITE_32BIT_ROWID +# define MAX_ROWID 0x7fffffff +#else + /* Some compilers complain about constants of the form 0x7fffffffffffffff. + ** Others complain about 0x7ffffffffffffffffLL. The following macro seems + ** to provide the constant while making all compilers happy. + */ +# define MAX_ROWID (i64)( (((u64)0x7fffffff)<<32) | (u64)0xffffffff ) +#endif + + if( !pC->useRandomRowid ){ + rc = sqlite3BtreeLast(pC->uc.pCursor, &res); + if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ + goto abort_due_to_error; + } + if( res ){ + v = 1; /* IMP: R-61914-48074 */ + }else{ + assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValid(pC->uc.pCursor) ); + v = sqlite3BtreeIntegerKey(pC->uc.pCursor); + if( v>=MAX_ROWID ){ + pC->useRandomRowid = 1; + }else{ + v++; /* IMP: R-29538-34987 */ + } + } + } + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINCREMENT + if( pOp->p3 ){ + /* Assert that P3 is a valid memory cell. */ + assert( pOp->p3>0 ); + if( p->pFrame ){ + for(pFrame=p->pFrame; pFrame->pParent; pFrame=pFrame->pParent); + /* Assert that P3 is a valid memory cell. */ + assert( pOp->p3<=pFrame->nMem ); + pMem = &pFrame->aMem[pOp->p3]; + }else{ + /* Assert that P3 is a valid memory cell. */ + assert( pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); + pMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + memAboutToChange(p, pMem); + } + assert( memIsValid(pMem) ); + + REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pMem); + sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pMem); + assert( (pMem->flags & MEM_Int)!=0 ); /* mem(P3) holds an integer */ + if( pMem->u.i==MAX_ROWID || pC->useRandomRowid ){ + rc = SQLITE_FULL; /* IMP: R-17817-00630 */ + goto abort_due_to_error; + } + if( v<pMem->u.i+1 ){ + v = pMem->u.i + 1; + } + pMem->u.i = v; + } +#endif + if( pC->useRandomRowid ){ + /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-07677-41881 If the largest ROWID is equal to the + ** largest possible integer (9223372036854775807) then the database + ** engine starts picking positive candidate ROWIDs at random until + ** it finds one that is not previously used. */ + assert( pOp->p3==0 ); /* We cannot be in random rowid mode if this is + ** an AUTOINCREMENT table. */ + cnt = 0; + do{ + sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(v), &v); + v &= (MAX_ROWID>>1); v++; /* Ensure that v is greater than zero */ + }while( ((rc = sqlite3BtreeTableMoveto(pC->uc.pCursor, (u64)v, + 0, &res))==SQLITE_OK) + && (res==0) + && (++cnt<100)); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + if( res==0 ){ + rc = SQLITE_FULL; /* IMP: R-38219-53002 */ + goto abort_due_to_error; + } + assert( v>0 ); /* EV: R-40812-03570 */ + } + pC->deferredMoveto = 0; + pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; + } + pOut->u.i = v; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: Insert P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 +** Synopsis: intkey=r[P3] data=r[P2] +** +** Write an entry into the table of cursor P1. A new entry is +** created if it doesn't already exist or the data for an existing +** entry is overwritten. The data is the value MEM_Blob stored in register +** number P2. The key is stored in register P3. The key must +** be a MEM_Int. +** +** If the OPFLAG_NCHANGE flag of P5 is set, then the row change count is +** incremented (otherwise not). If the OPFLAG_LASTROWID flag of P5 is set, +** then rowid is stored for subsequent return by the +** sqlite3_last_insert_rowid() function (otherwise it is unmodified). +** +** If the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT flag of P5 is set, the implementation might +** run faster by avoiding an unnecessary seek on cursor P1. However, +** the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT flag must only be set if there have been no prior +** seeks on the cursor or if the most recent seek used a key equal to P3. +** +** If the OPFLAG_ISUPDATE flag is set, then this opcode is part of an +** UPDATE operation. Otherwise (if the flag is clear) then this opcode +** is part of an INSERT operation. The difference is only important to +** the update hook. +** +** Parameter P4 may point to a Table structure, or may be NULL. If it is +** not NULL, then the update-hook (sqlite3.xUpdateCallback) is invoked +** following a successful insert. +** +** (WARNING/TODO: If P1 is a pseudo-cursor and P2 is dynamically +** allocated, then ownership of P2 is transferred to the pseudo-cursor +** and register P2 becomes ephemeral. If the cursor is changed, the +** value of register P2 will then change. Make sure this does not +** cause any problems.) +** +** This instruction only works on tables. The equivalent instruction +** for indices is OP_IdxInsert. +*/ +case OP_Insert: { + Mem *pData; /* MEM cell holding data for the record to be inserted */ + Mem *pKey; /* MEM cell holding key for the record */ + VdbeCursor *pC; /* Cursor to table into which insert is written */ + int seekResult; /* Result of prior seek or 0 if no USESEEKRESULT flag */ + const char *zDb; /* database name - used by the update hook */ + Table *pTab; /* Table structure - used by update and pre-update hooks */ + BtreePayload x; /* Payload to be inserted */ + + pData = &aMem[pOp->p2]; + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + assert( memIsValid(pData) ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( pC!=0 ); + assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); + assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 ); + assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); + assert( (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_ISNOOP) || pC->isTable ); + assert( pOp->p4type==P4_TABLE || pOp->p4type>=P4_STATIC ); + REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2, pData); + sqlite3VdbeIncrWriteCounter(p, pC); + + pKey = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + assert( pKey->flags & MEM_Int ); + assert( memIsValid(pKey) ); + REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pKey); + x.nKey = pKey->u.i; + + if( pOp->p4type==P4_TABLE && HAS_UPDATE_HOOK(db) ){ + assert( pC->iDb>=0 ); + zDb = db->aDb[pC->iDb].zDbSName; + pTab = pOp->p4.pTab; + assert( (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_ISNOOP) || HasRowid(pTab) ); + }else{ + pTab = 0; + zDb = 0; + } + +#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK + /* Invoke the pre-update hook, if any */ + if( pTab ){ + if( db->xPreUpdateCallback && !(pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE) ){ + sqlite3VdbePreUpdateHook(p,pC,SQLITE_INSERT,zDb,pTab,x.nKey,pOp->p2,-1); + } + if( db->xUpdateCallback==0 || pTab->aCol==0 ){ + /* Prevent post-update hook from running in cases when it should not */ + pTab = 0; + } + } + if( pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_ISNOOP ) break; +#endif + + if( pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_NCHANGE ) p->nChange++; + if( pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_LASTROWID ) db->lastRowid = x.nKey; + assert( (pData->flags & (MEM_Blob|MEM_Str))!=0 || pData->n==0 ); + x.pData = pData->z; + x.nData = pData->n; + seekResult = ((pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT) ? pC->seekResult : 0); + if( pData->flags & MEM_Zero ){ + x.nZero = pData->u.nZero; + }else{ + x.nZero = 0; + } + x.pKey = 0; + rc = sqlite3BtreeInsert(pC->uc.pCursor, &x, + (pOp->p5 & (OPFLAG_APPEND|OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION|OPFLAG_PREFORMAT)), + seekResult + ); + pC->deferredMoveto = 0; + pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; + + /* Invoke the update-hook if required. */ + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + if( pTab ){ + assert( db->xUpdateCallback!=0 ); + assert( pTab->aCol!=0 ); + db->xUpdateCallback(db->pUpdateArg, + (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE) ? SQLITE_UPDATE : SQLITE_INSERT, + zDb, pTab->zName, x.nKey); + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: RowCell P1 P2 P3 * * +** +** P1 and P2 are both open cursors. Both must be opened on the same type +** of table - intkey or index. This opcode is used as part of copying +** the current row from P2 into P1. If the cursors are opened on intkey +** tables, register P3 contains the rowid to use with the new record in +** P1. If they are opened on index tables, P3 is not used. +** +** This opcode must be followed by either an Insert or InsertIdx opcode +** with the OPFLAG_PREFORMAT flag set to complete the insert operation. +*/ +case OP_RowCell: { + VdbeCursor *pDest; /* Cursor to write to */ + VdbeCursor *pSrc; /* Cursor to read from */ + i64 iKey; /* Rowid value to insert with */ + assert( pOp[1].opcode==OP_Insert || pOp[1].opcode==OP_IdxInsert ); + assert( pOp[1].opcode==OP_Insert || pOp->p3==0 ); + assert( pOp[1].opcode==OP_IdxInsert || pOp->p3>0 ); + assert( pOp[1].p5 & OPFLAG_PREFORMAT ); + pDest = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + pSrc = p->apCsr[pOp->p2]; + iKey = pOp->p3 ? aMem[pOp->p3].u.i : 0; + rc = sqlite3BtreeTransferRow(pDest->uc.pCursor, pSrc->uc.pCursor, iKey); + if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error; + break; +}; + +/* Opcode: Delete P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 +** +** Delete the record at which the P1 cursor is currently pointing. +** +** If the OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION bit of the P5 parameter is set, then +** the cursor will be left pointing at either the next or the previous +** record in the table. If it is left pointing at the next record, then +** the next Next instruction will be a no-op. As a result, in this case +** it is ok to delete a record from within a Next loop. If +** OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION bit of P5 is clear, then the cursor will be +** left in an undefined state. +** +** If the OPFLAG_AUXDELETE bit is set on P5, that indicates that this +** delete one of several associated with deleting a table row and all its +** associated index entries. Exactly one of those deletes is the "primary" +** delete. The others are all on OPFLAG_FORDELETE cursors or else are +** marked with the AUXDELETE flag. +** +** If the OPFLAG_NCHANGE flag of P2 (NB: P2 not P5) is set, then the row +** change count is incremented (otherwise not). +** +** P1 must not be pseudo-table. It has to be a real table with +** multiple rows. +** +** If P4 is not NULL then it points to a Table object. In this case either +** the update or pre-update hook, or both, may be invoked. The P1 cursor must +** have been positioned using OP_NotFound prior to invoking this opcode in +** this case. Specifically, if one is configured, the pre-update hook is +** invoked if P4 is not NULL. The update-hook is invoked if one is configured, +** P4 is not NULL, and the OPFLAG_NCHANGE flag is set in P2. +** +** If the OPFLAG_ISUPDATE flag is set in P2, then P3 contains the address +** of the memory cell that contains the value that the rowid of the row will +** be set to by the update. +*/ +case OP_Delete: { + VdbeCursor *pC; + const char *zDb; + Table *pTab; + int opflags; + + opflags = pOp->p2; + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( pC!=0 ); + assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); + assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); + assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 ); + sqlite3VdbeIncrWriteCounter(p, pC); + +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + if( pOp->p4type==P4_TABLE + && HasRowid(pOp->p4.pTab) + && pOp->p5==0 + && sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValidNN(pC->uc.pCursor) + ){ + /* If p5 is zero, the seek operation that positioned the cursor prior to + ** OP_Delete will have also set the pC->movetoTarget field to the rowid of + ** the row that is being deleted */ + i64 iKey = sqlite3BtreeIntegerKey(pC->uc.pCursor); + assert( CORRUPT_DB || pC->movetoTarget==iKey ); + } +#endif + + /* If the update-hook or pre-update-hook will be invoked, set zDb to + ** the name of the db to pass as to it. Also set local pTab to a copy + ** of p4.pTab. Finally, if p5 is true, indicating that this cursor was + ** last moved with OP_Next or OP_Prev, not Seek or NotFound, set + ** VdbeCursor.movetoTarget to the current rowid. */ + if( pOp->p4type==P4_TABLE && HAS_UPDATE_HOOK(db) ){ + assert( pC->iDb>=0 ); + assert( pOp->p4.pTab!=0 ); + zDb = db->aDb[pC->iDb].zDbSName; + pTab = pOp->p4.pTab; + if( (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION)!=0 && pC->isTable ){ + pC->movetoTarget = sqlite3BtreeIntegerKey(pC->uc.pCursor); + } + }else{ + zDb = 0; + pTab = 0; + } + +#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK + /* Invoke the pre-update-hook if required. */ + assert( db->xPreUpdateCallback==0 || pTab==pOp->p4.pTab ); + if( db->xPreUpdateCallback && pTab ){ + assert( !(opflags & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE) + || HasRowid(pTab)==0 + || (aMem[pOp->p3].flags & MEM_Int) + ); + sqlite3VdbePreUpdateHook(p, pC, + (opflags & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE) ? SQLITE_UPDATE : SQLITE_DELETE, + zDb, pTab, pC->movetoTarget, + pOp->p3, -1 + ); + } + if( opflags & OPFLAG_ISNOOP ) break; +#endif + + /* Only flags that can be set are SAVEPOISTION and AUXDELETE */ + assert( (pOp->p5 & ~(OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION|OPFLAG_AUXDELETE))==0 ); + assert( OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION==BTREE_SAVEPOSITION ); + assert( OPFLAG_AUXDELETE==BTREE_AUXDELETE ); + +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + if( p->pFrame==0 ){ + if( pC->isEphemeral==0 + && (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_AUXDELETE)==0 + && (pC->wrFlag & OPFLAG_FORDELETE)==0 + ){ + nExtraDelete++; + } + if( pOp->p2 & OPFLAG_NCHANGE ){ + nExtraDelete--; + } + } +#endif + + rc = sqlite3BtreeDelete(pC->uc.pCursor, pOp->p5); + pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; + pC->seekResult = 0; + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + + /* Invoke the update-hook if required. */ + if( opflags & OPFLAG_NCHANGE ){ + p->nChange++; + if( db->xUpdateCallback && ALWAYS(pTab!=0) && HasRowid(pTab) ){ + db->xUpdateCallback(db->pUpdateArg, SQLITE_DELETE, zDb, pTab->zName, + pC->movetoTarget); + assert( pC->iDb>=0 ); + } + } + + break; +} +/* Opcode: ResetCount * * * * * +** +** The value of the change counter is copied to the database handle +** change counter (returned by subsequent calls to sqlite3_changes()). +** Then the VMs internal change counter resets to 0. +** This is used by trigger programs. +*/ +case OP_ResetCount: { + sqlite3VdbeSetChanges(db, p->nChange); + p->nChange = 0; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: SorterCompare P1 P2 P3 P4 +** Synopsis: if key(P1)!=trim(r[P3],P4) goto P2 +** +** P1 is a sorter cursor. This instruction compares a prefix of the +** record blob in register P3 against a prefix of the entry that +** the sorter cursor currently points to. Only the first P4 fields +** of r[P3] and the sorter record are compared. +** +** If either P3 or the sorter contains a NULL in one of their significant +** fields (not counting the P4 fields at the end which are ignored) then +** the comparison is assumed to be equal. +** +** Fall through to next instruction if the two records compare equal to +** each other. Jump to P2 if they are different. +*/ +case OP_SorterCompare: { + VdbeCursor *pC; + int res; + int nKeyCol; + + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( isSorter(pC) ); + assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 ); + pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + nKeyCol = pOp->p4.i; + res = 0; + rc = sqlite3VdbeSorterCompare(pC, pIn3, nKeyCol, &res); + VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0,2); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + if( res ) goto jump_to_p2; + break; +}; + +/* Opcode: SorterData P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: r[P2]=data +** +** Write into register P2 the current sorter data for sorter cursor P1. +** Then clear the column header cache on cursor P3. +** +** This opcode is normally use to move a record out of the sorter and into +** a register that is the source for a pseudo-table cursor created using +** OpenPseudo. That pseudo-table cursor is the one that is identified by +** parameter P3. Clearing the P3 column cache as part of this opcode saves +** us from having to issue a separate NullRow instruction to clear that cache. +*/ +case OP_SorterData: { + VdbeCursor *pC; + + pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2]; + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( isSorter(pC) ); + rc = sqlite3VdbeSorterRowkey(pC, pOut); + assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || (pOut->flags & MEM_Blob) ); + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + p->apCsr[pOp->p3]->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: RowData P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: r[P2]=data +** +** Write into register P2 the complete row content for the row at +** which cursor P1 is currently pointing. +** There is no interpretation of the data. +** It is just copied onto the P2 register exactly as +** it is found in the database file. +** +** If cursor P1 is an index, then the content is the key of the row. +** If cursor P2 is a table, then the content extracted is the data. +** +** If the P1 cursor must be pointing to a valid row (not a NULL row) +** of a real table, not a pseudo-table. +** +** If P3!=0 then this opcode is allowed to make an ephemeral pointer +** into the database page. That means that the content of the output +** register will be invalidated as soon as the cursor moves - including +** moves caused by other cursors that "save" the current cursors +** position in order that they can write to the same table. If P3==0 +** then a copy of the data is made into memory. P3!=0 is faster, but +** P3==0 is safer. +** +** If P3!=0 then the content of the P2 register is unsuitable for use +** in OP_Result and any OP_Result will invalidate the P2 register content. +** The P2 register content is invalidated by opcodes like OP_Function or +** by any use of another cursor pointing to the same table. +*/ +case OP_RowData: { + VdbeCursor *pC; + BtCursor *pCrsr; + u32 n; + + pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); + + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( pC!=0 ); + assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); + assert( isSorter(pC)==0 ); + assert( pC->nullRow==0 ); + assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); + pCrsr = pC->uc.pCursor; + + /* The OP_RowData opcodes always follow OP_NotExists or + ** OP_SeekRowid or OP_Rewind/Op_Next with no intervening instructions + ** that might invalidate the cursor. + ** If this where not the case, on of the following assert()s + ** would fail. Should this ever change (because of changes in the code + ** generator) then the fix would be to insert a call to + ** sqlite3VdbeCursorMoveto(). + */ + assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 ); + assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValid(pCrsr) ); + + n = sqlite3BtreePayloadSize(pCrsr); + if( n>(u32)db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH] ){ + goto too_big; + } + testcase( n==0 ); + rc = sqlite3VdbeMemFromBtreeZeroOffset(pCrsr, n, pOut); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + if( !pOp->p3 ) Deephemeralize(pOut); + UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pOut); + REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2, pOut); + break; +} + +/* Opcode: Rowid P1 P2 * * * +** Synopsis: r[P2]=PX rowid of P1 +** +** Store in register P2 an integer which is the key of the table entry that +** P1 is currently point to. +** +** P1 can be either an ordinary table or a virtual table. There used to +** be a separate OP_VRowid opcode for use with virtual tables, but this +** one opcode now works for both table types. +*/ +case OP_Rowid: { /* out2 */ + VdbeCursor *pC; + i64 v; + sqlite3_vtab *pVtab; + const sqlite3_module *pModule; + + pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( pC!=0 ); + assert( pC->eCurType!=CURTYPE_PSEUDO || pC->nullRow ); + if( pC->nullRow ){ + pOut->flags = MEM_Null; + break; + }else if( pC->deferredMoveto ){ + v = pC->movetoTarget; +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE + }else if( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_VTAB ){ + assert( pC->uc.pVCur!=0 ); + pVtab = pC->uc.pVCur->pVtab; + pModule = pVtab->pModule; + assert( pModule->xRowid ); + rc = pModule->xRowid(pC->uc.pVCur, &v); + sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; +#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ + }else{ + assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); + assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); + rc = sqlite3VdbeCursorRestore(pC); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + if( pC->nullRow ){ + pOut->flags = MEM_Null; + break; + } + v = sqlite3BtreeIntegerKey(pC->uc.pCursor); + } + pOut->u.i = v; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: NullRow P1 * * * * +** +** Move the cursor P1 to a null row. Any OP_Column operations +** that occur while the cursor is on the null row will always +** write a NULL. +** +** If cursor P1 is not previously opened, open it now to a special +** pseudo-cursor that always returns NULL for every column. +*/ +case OP_NullRow: { + VdbeCursor *pC; + + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + if( pC==0 ){ + /* If the cursor is not already open, create a special kind of + ** pseudo-cursor that always gives null rows. */ + pC = allocateCursor(p, pOp->p1, 1, CURTYPE_PSEUDO); + if( pC==0 ) goto no_mem; + pC->seekResult = 0; + pC->isTable = 1; + pC->noReuse = 1; + pC->uc.pCursor = sqlite3BtreeFakeValidCursor(); + } + pC->nullRow = 1; + pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; + if( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ){ + assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); + sqlite3BtreeClearCursor(pC->uc.pCursor); + } +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + if( pC->seekOp==0 ) pC->seekOp = OP_NullRow; +#endif + break; +} + +/* Opcode: SeekEnd P1 * * * * +** +** Position cursor P1 at the end of the btree for the purpose of +** appending a new entry onto the btree. +** +** It is assumed that the cursor is used only for appending and so +** if the cursor is valid, then the cursor must already be pointing +** at the end of the btree and so no changes are made to +** the cursor. +*/ +/* Opcode: Last P1 P2 * * * +** +** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Prev instruction for P1 +** will refer to the last entry in the database table or index. +** If the table or index is empty and P2>0, then jump immediately to P2. +** If P2 is 0 or if the table or index is not empty, fall through +** to the following instruction. +** +** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in reverse order, +** from the end toward the beginning. In other words, the cursor is +** configured to use Prev, not Next. +*/ +case OP_SeekEnd: +case OP_Last: { /* jump */ + VdbeCursor *pC; + BtCursor *pCrsr; + int res; + + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( pC!=0 ); + assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); + pCrsr = pC->uc.pCursor; + res = 0; + assert( pCrsr!=0 ); +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + pC->seekOp = pOp->opcode; +#endif + if( pOp->opcode==OP_SeekEnd ){ + assert( pOp->p2==0 ); + pC->seekResult = -1; + if( sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValidNN(pCrsr) ){ + break; + } + } + rc = sqlite3BtreeLast(pCrsr, &res); + pC->nullRow = (u8)res; + pC->deferredMoveto = 0; + pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + if( pOp->p2>0 ){ + VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0,2); + if( res ) goto jump_to_p2; + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: IfSmaller P1 P2 P3 * * +** +** Estimate the number of rows in the table P1. Jump to P2 if that +** estimate is less than approximately 2**(0.1*P3). +*/ +case OP_IfSmaller: { /* jump */ + VdbeCursor *pC; + BtCursor *pCrsr; + int res; + i64 sz; + + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( pC!=0 ); + pCrsr = pC->uc.pCursor; + assert( pCrsr ); + rc = sqlite3BtreeFirst(pCrsr, &res); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + if( res==0 ){ + sz = sqlite3BtreeRowCountEst(pCrsr); + if( ALWAYS(sz>=0) && sqlite3LogEst((u64)sz)<pOp->p3 ) res = 1; + } + VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0,2); + if( res ) goto jump_to_p2; + break; +} + + +/* Opcode: SorterSort P1 P2 * * * +** +** After all records have been inserted into the Sorter object +** identified by P1, invoke this opcode to actually do the sorting. +** Jump to P2 if there are no records to be sorted. +** +** This opcode is an alias for OP_Sort and OP_Rewind that is used +** for Sorter objects. +*/ +/* Opcode: Sort P1 P2 * * * +** +** This opcode does exactly the same thing as OP_Rewind except that +** it increments an undocumented global variable used for testing. +** +** Sorting is accomplished by writing records into a sorting index, +** then rewinding that index and playing it back from beginning to +** end. We use the OP_Sort opcode instead of OP_Rewind to do the +** rewinding so that the global variable will be incremented and +** regression tests can determine whether or not the optimizer is +** correctly optimizing out sorts. +*/ +case OP_SorterSort: /* jump */ +case OP_Sort: { /* jump */ +#ifdef SQLITE_TEST + sqlite3_sort_count++; + sqlite3_search_count--; +#endif + p->aCounter[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_SORT]++; + /* Fall through into OP_Rewind */ + /* no break */ deliberate_fall_through +} +/* Opcode: Rewind P1 P2 * * * +** +** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Next instruction for P1 +** will refer to the first entry in the database table or index. +** If the table or index is empty, jump immediately to P2. +** If the table or index is not empty, fall through to the following +** instruction. +** +** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in forward order, +** from the beginning toward the end. In other words, the cursor is +** configured to use Next, not Prev. +*/ +case OP_Rewind: { /* jump */ + VdbeCursor *pC; + BtCursor *pCrsr; + int res; + + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + assert( pOp->p5==0 ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( pC!=0 ); + assert( isSorter(pC)==(pOp->opcode==OP_SorterSort) ); + res = 1; +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + pC->seekOp = OP_Rewind; +#endif + if( isSorter(pC) ){ + rc = sqlite3VdbeSorterRewind(pC, &res); + }else{ + assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); + pCrsr = pC->uc.pCursor; + assert( pCrsr ); + rc = sqlite3BtreeFirst(pCrsr, &res); + pC->deferredMoveto = 0; + pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; + } + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + pC->nullRow = (u8)res; + assert( pOp->p2>0 && pOp->p2<p->nOp ); + VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0,2); + if( res ) goto jump_to_p2; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: Next P1 P2 P3 * P5 +** +** Advance cursor P1 so that it points to the next key/data pair in its +** table or index. If there are no more key/value pairs then fall through +** to the following instruction. But if the cursor advance was successful, +** jump immediately to P2. +** +** The Next opcode is only valid following an SeekGT, SeekGE, or +** OP_Rewind opcode used to position the cursor. Next is not allowed +** to follow SeekLT, SeekLE, or OP_Last. +** +** The P1 cursor must be for a real table, not a pseudo-table. P1 must have +** been opened prior to this opcode or the program will segfault. +** +** The P3 value is a hint to the btree implementation. If P3==1, that +** means P1 is an SQL index and that this instruction could have been +** omitted if that index had been unique. P3 is usually 0. P3 is +** always either 0 or 1. +** +** If P5 is positive and the jump is taken, then event counter +** number P5-1 in the prepared statement is incremented. +** +** See also: Prev +*/ +/* Opcode: Prev P1 P2 P3 * P5 +** +** Back up cursor P1 so that it points to the previous key/data pair in its +** table or index. If there is no previous key/value pairs then fall through +** to the following instruction. But if the cursor backup was successful, +** jump immediately to P2. +** +** +** The Prev opcode is only valid following an SeekLT, SeekLE, or +** OP_Last opcode used to position the cursor. Prev is not allowed +** to follow SeekGT, SeekGE, or OP_Rewind. +** +** The P1 cursor must be for a real table, not a pseudo-table. If P1 is +** not open then the behavior is undefined. +** +** The P3 value is a hint to the btree implementation. If P3==1, that +** means P1 is an SQL index and that this instruction could have been +** omitted if that index had been unique. P3 is usually 0. P3 is +** always either 0 or 1. +** +** If P5 is positive and the jump is taken, then event counter +** number P5-1 in the prepared statement is incremented. +*/ +/* Opcode: SorterNext P1 P2 * * P5 +** +** This opcode works just like OP_Next except that P1 must be a +** sorter object for which the OP_SorterSort opcode has been +** invoked. This opcode advances the cursor to the next sorted +** record, or jumps to P2 if there are no more sorted records. +*/ +case OP_SorterNext: { /* jump */ + VdbeCursor *pC; + + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( isSorter(pC) ); + rc = sqlite3VdbeSorterNext(db, pC); + goto next_tail; + +case OP_Prev: /* jump */ + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + assert( pOp->p5==0 + || pOp->p5==SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FULLSCAN_STEP + || pOp->p5==SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_AUTOINDEX); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( pC!=0 ); + assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 ); + assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); + assert( pC->seekOp==OP_SeekLT || pC->seekOp==OP_SeekLE + || pC->seekOp==OP_Last || pC->seekOp==OP_IfNoHope + || pC->seekOp==OP_NullRow); + rc = sqlite3BtreePrevious(pC->uc.pCursor, pOp->p3); + goto next_tail; + +case OP_Next: /* jump */ + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + assert( pOp->p5==0 + || pOp->p5==SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FULLSCAN_STEP + || pOp->p5==SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_AUTOINDEX); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( pC!=0 ); + assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 ); + assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); + assert( pC->seekOp==OP_SeekGT || pC->seekOp==OP_SeekGE + || pC->seekOp==OP_Rewind || pC->seekOp==OP_Found + || pC->seekOp==OP_NullRow|| pC->seekOp==OP_SeekRowid + || pC->seekOp==OP_IfNoHope); + rc = sqlite3BtreeNext(pC->uc.pCursor, pOp->p3); + +next_tail: + pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; + VdbeBranchTaken(rc==SQLITE_OK,2); + if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ + pC->nullRow = 0; + p->aCounter[pOp->p5]++; +#ifdef SQLITE_TEST + sqlite3_search_count++; +#endif + goto jump_to_p2_and_check_for_interrupt; + } + if( rc!=SQLITE_DONE ) goto abort_due_to_error; + rc = SQLITE_OK; + pC->nullRow = 1; + goto check_for_interrupt; +} + +/* Opcode: IdxInsert P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 +** Synopsis: key=r[P2] +** +** Register P2 holds an SQL index key made using the +** MakeRecord instructions. This opcode writes that key +** into the index P1. Data for the entry is nil. +** +** If P4 is not zero, then it is the number of values in the unpacked +** key of reg(P2). In that case, P3 is the index of the first register +** for the unpacked key. The availability of the unpacked key can sometimes +** be an optimization. +** +** If P5 has the OPFLAG_APPEND bit set, that is a hint to the b-tree layer +** that this insert is likely to be an append. +** +** If P5 has the OPFLAG_NCHANGE bit set, then the change counter is +** incremented by this instruction. If the OPFLAG_NCHANGE bit is clear, +** then the change counter is unchanged. +** +** If the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT flag of P5 is set, the implementation might +** run faster by avoiding an unnecessary seek on cursor P1. However, +** the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT flag must only be set if there have been no prior +** seeks on the cursor or if the most recent seek used a key equivalent +** to P2. +** +** This instruction only works for indices. The equivalent instruction +** for tables is OP_Insert. +*/ +case OP_IdxInsert: { /* in2 */ + VdbeCursor *pC; + BtreePayload x; + + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + sqlite3VdbeIncrWriteCounter(p, pC); + assert( pC!=0 ); + assert( !isSorter(pC) ); + pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2]; + assert( (pIn2->flags & MEM_Blob) || (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_PREFORMAT) ); + if( pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_NCHANGE ) p->nChange++; + assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); + assert( pC->isTable==0 ); + rc = ExpandBlob(pIn2); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + x.nKey = pIn2->n; + x.pKey = pIn2->z; + x.aMem = aMem + pOp->p3; + x.nMem = (u16)pOp->p4.i; + rc = sqlite3BtreeInsert(pC->uc.pCursor, &x, + (pOp->p5 & (OPFLAG_APPEND|OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION|OPFLAG_PREFORMAT)), + ((pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT) ? pC->seekResult : 0) + ); + assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 ); + pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; + if( rc) goto abort_due_to_error; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: SorterInsert P1 P2 * * * +** Synopsis: key=r[P2] +** +** Register P2 holds an SQL index key made using the +** MakeRecord instructions. This opcode writes that key +** into the sorter P1. Data for the entry is nil. +*/ +case OP_SorterInsert: { /* in2 */ + VdbeCursor *pC; + + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + sqlite3VdbeIncrWriteCounter(p, pC); + assert( pC!=0 ); + assert( isSorter(pC) ); + pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2]; + assert( pIn2->flags & MEM_Blob ); + assert( pC->isTable==0 ); + rc = ExpandBlob(pIn2); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + rc = sqlite3VdbeSorterWrite(pC, pIn2); + if( rc) goto abort_due_to_error; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: IdxDelete P1 P2 P3 * P5 +** Synopsis: key=r[P2@P3] +** +** The content of P3 registers starting at register P2 form +** an unpacked index key. This opcode removes that entry from the +** index opened by cursor P1. +** +** If P5 is not zero, then raise an SQLITE_CORRUPT_INDEX error +** if no matching index entry is found. This happens when running +** an UPDATE or DELETE statement and the index entry to be updated +** or deleted is not found. For some uses of IdxDelete +** (example: the EXCEPT operator) it does not matter that no matching +** entry is found. For those cases, P5 is zero. Also, do not raise +** this (self-correcting and non-critical) error if in writable_schema mode. +*/ +case OP_IdxDelete: { + VdbeCursor *pC; + BtCursor *pCrsr; + int res; + UnpackedRecord r; + + assert( pOp->p3>0 ); + assert( pOp->p2>0 && pOp->p2+pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1 ); + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( pC!=0 ); + assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); + sqlite3VdbeIncrWriteCounter(p, pC); + pCrsr = pC->uc.pCursor; + assert( pCrsr!=0 ); + r.pKeyInfo = pC->pKeyInfo; + r.nField = (u16)pOp->p3; + r.default_rc = 0; + r.aMem = &aMem[pOp->p2]; + rc = sqlite3BtreeIndexMoveto(pCrsr, &r, &res); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + if( res==0 ){ + rc = sqlite3BtreeDelete(pCrsr, BTREE_AUXDELETE); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + }else if( pOp->p5 && !sqlite3WritableSchema(db) ){ + rc = sqlite3ReportError(SQLITE_CORRUPT_INDEX, __LINE__, "index corruption"); + goto abort_due_to_error; + } + assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 ); + pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; + pC->seekResult = 0; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: DeferredSeek P1 * P3 P4 * +** Synopsis: Move P3 to P1.rowid if needed +** +** P1 is an open index cursor and P3 is a cursor on the corresponding +** table. This opcode does a deferred seek of the P3 table cursor +** to the row that corresponds to the current row of P1. +** +** This is a deferred seek. Nothing actually happens until +** the cursor is used to read a record. That way, if no reads +** occur, no unnecessary I/O happens. +** +** P4 may be an array of integers (type P4_INTARRAY) containing +** one entry for each column in the P3 table. If array entry a(i) +** is non-zero, then reading column a(i)-1 from cursor P3 is +** equivalent to performing the deferred seek and then reading column i +** from P1. This information is stored in P3 and used to redirect +** reads against P3 over to P1, thus possibly avoiding the need to +** seek and read cursor P3. +*/ +/* Opcode: IdxRowid P1 P2 * * * +** Synopsis: r[P2]=rowid +** +** Write into register P2 an integer which is the last entry in the record at +** the end of the index key pointed to by cursor P1. This integer should be +** the rowid of the table entry to which this index entry points. +** +** See also: Rowid, MakeRecord. +*/ +case OP_DeferredSeek: +case OP_IdxRowid: { /* out2 */ + VdbeCursor *pC; /* The P1 index cursor */ + VdbeCursor *pTabCur; /* The P2 table cursor (OP_DeferredSeek only) */ + i64 rowid; /* Rowid that P1 current points to */ + + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( pC!=0 ); + assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE || IsNullCursor(pC) ); + assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); + assert( pC->isTable==0 || IsNullCursor(pC) ); + assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 ); + assert( !pC->nullRow || pOp->opcode==OP_IdxRowid ); + + /* The IdxRowid and Seek opcodes are combined because of the commonality + ** of sqlite3VdbeCursorRestore() and sqlite3VdbeIdxRowid(). */ + rc = sqlite3VdbeCursorRestore(pC); + + /* sqlite3VdbeCursorRestore() may fail if the cursor has been disturbed + ** since it was last positioned and an error (e.g. OOM or an IO error) + ** occurs while trying to reposition it. */ + if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error; + + if( !pC->nullRow ){ + rowid = 0; /* Not needed. Only used to silence a warning. */ + rc = sqlite3VdbeIdxRowid(db, pC->uc.pCursor, &rowid); + if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ + goto abort_due_to_error; + } + if( pOp->opcode==OP_DeferredSeek ){ + assert( pOp->p3>=0 && pOp->p3<p->nCursor ); + pTabCur = p->apCsr[pOp->p3]; + assert( pTabCur!=0 ); + assert( pTabCur->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); + assert( pTabCur->uc.pCursor!=0 ); + assert( pTabCur->isTable ); + pTabCur->nullRow = 0; + pTabCur->movetoTarget = rowid; + pTabCur->deferredMoveto = 1; + pTabCur->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; + assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INTARRAY || pOp->p4.ai==0 ); + assert( !pTabCur->isEphemeral ); + pTabCur->ub.aAltMap = pOp->p4.ai; + assert( !pC->isEphemeral ); + pTabCur->pAltCursor = pC; + }else{ + pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); + pOut->u.i = rowid; + } + }else{ + assert( pOp->opcode==OP_IdxRowid ); + sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(&aMem[pOp->p2]); + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: FinishSeek P1 * * * * +** +** If cursor P1 was previously moved via OP_DeferredSeek, complete that +** seek operation now, without further delay. If the cursor seek has +** already occurred, this instruction is a no-op. +*/ +case OP_FinishSeek: { + VdbeCursor *pC; /* The P1 index cursor */ + + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + if( pC->deferredMoveto ){ + rc = sqlite3VdbeFinishMoveto(pC); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: IdxGE P1 P2 P3 P4 * +** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] +** +** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index +** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY. Compare this key value against the index +** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID +** fields at the end. +** +** If the P1 index entry is greater than or equal to the key value +** then jump to P2. Otherwise fall through to the next instruction. +*/ +/* Opcode: IdxGT P1 P2 P3 P4 * +** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] +** +** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index +** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY. Compare this key value against the index +** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID +** fields at the end. +** +** If the P1 index entry is greater than the key value +** then jump to P2. Otherwise fall through to the next instruction. +*/ +/* Opcode: IdxLT P1 P2 P3 P4 * +** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] +** +** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index +** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID. Compare this key value against +** the index that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or +** ROWID on the P1 index. +** +** If the P1 index entry is less than the key value then jump to P2. +** Otherwise fall through to the next instruction. +*/ +/* Opcode: IdxLE P1 P2 P3 P4 * +** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] +** +** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index +** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID. Compare this key value against +** the index that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or +** ROWID on the P1 index. +** +** If the P1 index entry is less than or equal to the key value then jump +** to P2. Otherwise fall through to the next instruction. +*/ +case OP_IdxLE: /* jump */ +case OP_IdxGT: /* jump */ +case OP_IdxLT: /* jump */ +case OP_IdxGE: { /* jump */ + VdbeCursor *pC; + int res; + UnpackedRecord r; + + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( pC!=0 ); + assert( pC->isOrdered ); + assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); + assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0); + assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 ); + assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 ); + r.pKeyInfo = pC->pKeyInfo; + r.nField = (u16)pOp->p4.i; + if( pOp->opcode<OP_IdxLT ){ + assert( pOp->opcode==OP_IdxLE || pOp->opcode==OP_IdxGT ); + r.default_rc = -1; + }else{ + assert( pOp->opcode==OP_IdxGE || pOp->opcode==OP_IdxLT ); + r.default_rc = 0; + } + r.aMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + { + int i; + for(i=0; i<r.nField; i++){ + assert( memIsValid(&r.aMem[i]) ); + REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3+i, &aMem[pOp->p3+i]); + } + } +#endif + + /* Inlined version of sqlite3VdbeIdxKeyCompare() */ + { + i64 nCellKey = 0; + BtCursor *pCur; + Mem m; + + assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); + pCur = pC->uc.pCursor; + assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValid(pCur) ); + nCellKey = sqlite3BtreePayloadSize(pCur); + /* nCellKey will always be between 0 and 0xffffffff because of the way + ** that btreeParseCellPtr() and sqlite3GetVarint32() are implemented */ + if( nCellKey<=0 || nCellKey>0x7fffffff ){ + rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; + goto abort_due_to_error; + } + sqlite3VdbeMemInit(&m, db, 0); + rc = sqlite3VdbeMemFromBtreeZeroOffset(pCur, (u32)nCellKey, &m); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + res = sqlite3VdbeRecordCompareWithSkip(m.n, m.z, &r, 0); + sqlite3VdbeMemReleaseMalloc(&m); + } + /* End of inlined sqlite3VdbeIdxKeyCompare() */ + + assert( (OP_IdxLE&1)==(OP_IdxLT&1) && (OP_IdxGE&1)==(OP_IdxGT&1) ); + if( (pOp->opcode&1)==(OP_IdxLT&1) ){ + assert( pOp->opcode==OP_IdxLE || pOp->opcode==OP_IdxLT ); + res = -res; + }else{ + assert( pOp->opcode==OP_IdxGE || pOp->opcode==OP_IdxGT ); + res++; + } + VdbeBranchTaken(res>0,2); + assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); + if( res>0 ) goto jump_to_p2; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: Destroy P1 P2 P3 * * +** +** Delete an entire database table or index whose root page in the database +** file is given by P1. +** +** The table being destroyed is in the main database file if P3==0. If +** P3==1 then the table to be clear is in the auxiliary database file +** that is used to store tables create using CREATE TEMPORARY TABLE. +** +** If AUTOVACUUM is enabled then it is possible that another root page +** might be moved into the newly deleted root page in order to keep all +** root pages contiguous at the beginning of the database. The former +** value of the root page that moved - its value before the move occurred - +** is stored in register P2. If no page movement was required (because the +** table being dropped was already the last one in the database) then a +** zero is stored in register P2. If AUTOVACUUM is disabled then a zero +** is stored in register P2. +** +** This opcode throws an error if there are any active reader VMs when +** it is invoked. This is done to avoid the difficulty associated with +** updating existing cursors when a root page is moved in an AUTOVACUUM +** database. This error is thrown even if the database is not an AUTOVACUUM +** db in order to avoid introducing an incompatibility between autovacuum +** and non-autovacuum modes. +** +** See also: Clear +*/ +case OP_Destroy: { /* out2 */ + int iMoved; + int iDb; + + sqlite3VdbeIncrWriteCounter(p, 0); + assert( p->readOnly==0 ); + assert( pOp->p1>1 ); + pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); + pOut->flags = MEM_Null; + if( db->nVdbeRead > db->nVDestroy+1 ){ + rc = SQLITE_LOCKED; + p->errorAction = OE_Abort; + goto abort_due_to_error; + }else{ + iDb = pOp->p3; + assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, iDb) ); + iMoved = 0; /* Not needed. Only to silence a warning. */ + rc = sqlite3BtreeDropTable(db->aDb[iDb].pBt, pOp->p1, &iMoved); + pOut->flags = MEM_Int; + pOut->u.i = iMoved; + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM + if( iMoved!=0 ){ + sqlite3RootPageMoved(db, iDb, iMoved, pOp->p1); + /* All OP_Destroy operations occur on the same btree */ + assert( resetSchemaOnFault==0 || resetSchemaOnFault==iDb+1 ); + resetSchemaOnFault = iDb+1; + } +#endif + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: Clear P1 P2 P3 +** +** Delete all contents of the database table or index whose root page +** in the database file is given by P1. But, unlike Destroy, do not +** remove the table or index from the database file. +** +** The table being clear is in the main database file if P2==0. If +** P2==1 then the table to be clear is in the auxiliary database file +** that is used to store tables create using CREATE TEMPORARY TABLE. +** +** If the P3 value is non-zero, then the row change count is incremented +** by the number of rows in the table being cleared. If P3 is greater +** than zero, then the value stored in register P3 is also incremented +** by the number of rows in the table being cleared. +** +** See also: Destroy +*/ +case OP_Clear: { + i64 nChange; + + sqlite3VdbeIncrWriteCounter(p, 0); + nChange = 0; + assert( p->readOnly==0 ); + assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p2) ); + rc = sqlite3BtreeClearTable(db->aDb[pOp->p2].pBt, (u32)pOp->p1, &nChange); + if( pOp->p3 ){ + p->nChange += nChange; + if( pOp->p3>0 ){ + assert( memIsValid(&aMem[pOp->p3]) ); + memAboutToChange(p, &aMem[pOp->p3]); + aMem[pOp->p3].u.i += nChange; + } + } + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: ResetSorter P1 * * * * +** +** Delete all contents from the ephemeral table or sorter +** that is open on cursor P1. +** +** This opcode only works for cursors used for sorting and +** opened with OP_OpenEphemeral or OP_SorterOpen. +*/ +case OP_ResetSorter: { + VdbeCursor *pC; + + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( pC!=0 ); + if( isSorter(pC) ){ + sqlite3VdbeSorterReset(db, pC->uc.pSorter); + }else{ + assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); + assert( pC->isEphemeral ); + rc = sqlite3BtreeClearTableOfCursor(pC->uc.pCursor); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: CreateBtree P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: r[P2]=root iDb=P1 flags=P3 +** +** Allocate a new b-tree in the main database file if P1==0 or in the +** TEMP database file if P1==1 or in an attached database if +** P1>1. The P3 argument must be 1 (BTREE_INTKEY) for a rowid table +** it must be 2 (BTREE_BLOBKEY) for an index or WITHOUT ROWID table. +** The root page number of the new b-tree is stored in register P2. +*/ +case OP_CreateBtree: { /* out2 */ + Pgno pgno; + Db *pDb; + + sqlite3VdbeIncrWriteCounter(p, 0); + pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); + pgno = 0; + assert( pOp->p3==BTREE_INTKEY || pOp->p3==BTREE_BLOBKEY ); + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb ); + assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p1) ); + assert( p->readOnly==0 ); + pDb = &db->aDb[pOp->p1]; + assert( pDb->pBt!=0 ); + rc = sqlite3BtreeCreateTable(pDb->pBt, &pgno, pOp->p3); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + pOut->u.i = pgno; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: SqlExec * * * P4 * +** +** Run the SQL statement or statements specified in the P4 string. +*/ +case OP_SqlExec: { + sqlite3VdbeIncrWriteCounter(p, 0); + db->nSqlExec++; + rc = sqlite3_exec(db, pOp->p4.z, 0, 0, 0); + db->nSqlExec--; + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: ParseSchema P1 * * P4 * +** +** Read and parse all entries from the schema table of database P1 +** that match the WHERE clause P4. If P4 is a NULL pointer, then the +** entire schema for P1 is reparsed. +** +** This opcode invokes the parser to create a new virtual machine, +** then runs the new virtual machine. It is thus a re-entrant opcode. +*/ +case OP_ParseSchema: { + int iDb; + const char *zSchema; + char *zSql; + InitData initData; + + /* Any prepared statement that invokes this opcode will hold mutexes + ** on every btree. This is a prerequisite for invoking + ** sqlite3InitCallback(). + */ +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + for(iDb=0; iDb<db->nDb; iDb++){ + assert( iDb==1 || sqlite3BtreeHoldsMutex(db->aDb[iDb].pBt) ); + } +#endif + + iDb = pOp->p1; + assert( iDb>=0 && iDb<db->nDb ); + assert( DbHasProperty(db, iDb, DB_SchemaLoaded) + || db->mallocFailed + || (CORRUPT_DB && (db->flags & SQLITE_NoSchemaError)!=0) ); + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_ALTERTABLE + if( pOp->p4.z==0 ){ + sqlite3SchemaClear(db->aDb[iDb].pSchema); + db->mDbFlags &= ~DBFLAG_SchemaKnownOk; + rc = sqlite3InitOne(db, iDb, &p->zErrMsg, pOp->p5); + db->mDbFlags |= DBFLAG_SchemaChange; + p->expired = 0; + }else +#endif + { + zSchema = LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE; + initData.db = db; + initData.iDb = iDb; + initData.pzErrMsg = &p->zErrMsg; + initData.mInitFlags = 0; + initData.mxPage = sqlite3BtreeLastPage(db->aDb[iDb].pBt); + zSql = sqlite3MPrintf(db, + "SELECT*FROM\"%w\".%s WHERE %s ORDER BY rowid", + db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName, zSchema, pOp->p4.z); + if( zSql==0 ){ + rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; + }else{ + assert( db->init.busy==0 ); + db->init.busy = 1; + initData.rc = SQLITE_OK; + initData.nInitRow = 0; + assert( !db->mallocFailed ); + rc = sqlite3_exec(db, zSql, sqlite3InitCallback, &initData, 0); + if( rc==SQLITE_OK ) rc = initData.rc; + if( rc==SQLITE_OK && initData.nInitRow==0 ){ + /* The OP_ParseSchema opcode with a non-NULL P4 argument should parse + ** at least one SQL statement. Any less than that indicates that + ** the sqlite_schema table is corrupt. */ + rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; + } + sqlite3DbFreeNN(db, zSql); + db->init.busy = 0; + } + } + if( rc ){ + sqlite3ResetAllSchemasOfConnection(db); + if( rc==SQLITE_NOMEM ){ + goto no_mem; + } + goto abort_due_to_error; + } + break; +} + +#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ANALYZE) +/* Opcode: LoadAnalysis P1 * * * * +** +** Read the sqlite_stat1 table for database P1 and load the content +** of that table into the internal index hash table. This will cause +** the analysis to be used when preparing all subsequent queries. +*/ +case OP_LoadAnalysis: { + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb ); + rc = sqlite3AnalysisLoad(db, pOp->p1); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + break; +} +#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ANALYZE) */ + +/* Opcode: DropTable P1 * * P4 * +** +** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe +** the table named P4 in database P1. This is called after a table +** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep +** the internal representation of the +** schema consistent with what is on disk. +*/ +case OP_DropTable: { + sqlite3VdbeIncrWriteCounter(p, 0); + sqlite3UnlinkAndDeleteTable(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p4.z); + break; +} + +/* Opcode: DropIndex P1 * * P4 * +** +** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe +** the index named P4 in database P1. This is called after an index +** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) +** in order to keep the internal representation of the +** schema consistent with what is on disk. +*/ +case OP_DropIndex: { + sqlite3VdbeIncrWriteCounter(p, 0); + sqlite3UnlinkAndDeleteIndex(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p4.z); + break; +} + +/* Opcode: DropTrigger P1 * * P4 * +** +** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe +** the trigger named P4 in database P1. This is called after a trigger +** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep +** the internal representation of the +** schema consistent with what is on disk. +*/ +case OP_DropTrigger: { + sqlite3VdbeIncrWriteCounter(p, 0); + sqlite3UnlinkAndDeleteTrigger(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p4.z); + break; +} + + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_INTEGRITY_CHECK +/* Opcode: IntegrityCk P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 +** +** Do an analysis of the currently open database. Store in +** register P1 the text of an error message describing any problems. +** If no problems are found, store a NULL in register P1. +** +** The register P3 contains one less than the maximum number of allowed errors. +** At most reg(P3) errors will be reported. +** In other words, the analysis stops as soon as reg(P1) errors are +** seen. Reg(P1) is updated with the number of errors remaining. +** +** The root page numbers of all tables in the database are integers +** stored in P4_INTARRAY argument. +** +** If P5 is not zero, the check is done on the auxiliary database +** file, not the main database file. +** +** This opcode is used to implement the integrity_check pragma. +*/ +case OP_IntegrityCk: { + int nRoot; /* Number of tables to check. (Number of root pages.) */ + Pgno *aRoot; /* Array of rootpage numbers for tables to be checked */ + int nErr; /* Number of errors reported */ + char *z; /* Text of the error report */ + Mem *pnErr; /* Register keeping track of errors remaining */ + + assert( p->bIsReader ); + nRoot = pOp->p2; + aRoot = pOp->p4.ai; + assert( nRoot>0 ); + assert( aRoot[0]==(Pgno)nRoot ); + assert( pOp->p3>0 && pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); + pnErr = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + assert( (pnErr->flags & MEM_Int)!=0 ); + assert( (pnErr->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob))==0 ); + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + assert( pOp->p5<db->nDb ); + assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p5) ); + z = sqlite3BtreeIntegrityCheck(db, db->aDb[pOp->p5].pBt, &aRoot[1], nRoot, + (int)pnErr->u.i+1, &nErr); + sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pIn1); + if( nErr==0 ){ + assert( z==0 ); + }else if( z==0 ){ + goto no_mem; + }else{ + pnErr->u.i -= nErr-1; + sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pIn1, z, -1, SQLITE_UTF8, sqlite3_free); + } + UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pIn1); + sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pIn1, encoding); + goto check_for_interrupt; +} +#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_INTEGRITY_CHECK */ + +/* Opcode: RowSetAdd P1 P2 * * * +** Synopsis: rowset(P1)=r[P2] +** +** Insert the integer value held by register P2 into a RowSet object +** held in register P1. +** +** An assertion fails if P2 is not an integer. +*/ +case OP_RowSetAdd: { /* in1, in2 */ + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2]; + assert( (pIn2->flags & MEM_Int)!=0 ); + if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Blob)==0 ){ + if( sqlite3VdbeMemSetRowSet(pIn1) ) goto no_mem; + } + assert( sqlite3VdbeMemIsRowSet(pIn1) ); + sqlite3RowSetInsert((RowSet*)pIn1->z, pIn2->u.i); + break; +} + +/* Opcode: RowSetRead P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: r[P3]=rowset(P1) +** +** Extract the smallest value from the RowSet object in P1 +** and put that value into register P3. +** Or, if RowSet object P1 is initially empty, leave P3 +** unchanged and jump to instruction P2. +*/ +case OP_RowSetRead: { /* jump, in1, out3 */ + i64 val; + + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + assert( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Blob)==0 || sqlite3VdbeMemIsRowSet(pIn1) ); + if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Blob)==0 + || sqlite3RowSetNext((RowSet*)pIn1->z, &val)==0 + ){ + /* The boolean index is empty */ + sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pIn1); + VdbeBranchTaken(1,2); + goto jump_to_p2_and_check_for_interrupt; + }else{ + /* A value was pulled from the index */ + VdbeBranchTaken(0,2); + sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(&aMem[pOp->p3], val); + } + goto check_for_interrupt; +} + +/* Opcode: RowSetTest P1 P2 P3 P4 +** Synopsis: if r[P3] in rowset(P1) goto P2 +** +** Register P3 is assumed to hold a 64-bit integer value. If register P1 +** contains a RowSet object and that RowSet object contains +** the value held in P3, jump to register P2. Otherwise, insert the +** integer in P3 into the RowSet and continue on to the +** next opcode. +** +** The RowSet object is optimized for the case where sets of integers +** are inserted in distinct phases, which each set contains no duplicates. +** Each set is identified by a unique P4 value. The first set +** must have P4==0, the final set must have P4==-1, and for all other sets +** must have P4>0. +** +** This allows optimizations: (a) when P4==0 there is no need to test +** the RowSet object for P3, as it is guaranteed not to contain it, +** (b) when P4==-1 there is no need to insert the value, as it will +** never be tested for, and (c) when a value that is part of set X is +** inserted, there is no need to search to see if the same value was +** previously inserted as part of set X (only if it was previously +** inserted as part of some other set). +*/ +case OP_RowSetTest: { /* jump, in1, in3 */ + int iSet; + int exists; + + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + iSet = pOp->p4.i; + assert( pIn3->flags&MEM_Int ); + + /* If there is anything other than a rowset object in memory cell P1, + ** delete it now and initialize P1 with an empty rowset + */ + if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Blob)==0 ){ + if( sqlite3VdbeMemSetRowSet(pIn1) ) goto no_mem; + } + assert( sqlite3VdbeMemIsRowSet(pIn1) ); + assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 ); + assert( iSet==-1 || iSet>=0 ); + if( iSet ){ + exists = sqlite3RowSetTest((RowSet*)pIn1->z, iSet, pIn3->u.i); + VdbeBranchTaken(exists!=0,2); + if( exists ) goto jump_to_p2; + } + if( iSet>=0 ){ + sqlite3RowSetInsert((RowSet*)pIn1->z, pIn3->u.i); + } + break; +} + + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER + +/* Opcode: Program P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 +** +** Execute the trigger program passed as P4 (type P4_SUBPROGRAM). +** +** P1 contains the address of the memory cell that contains the first memory +** cell in an array of values used as arguments to the sub-program. P2 +** contains the address to jump to if the sub-program throws an IGNORE +** exception using the RAISE() function. Register P3 contains the address +** of a memory cell in this (the parent) VM that is used to allocate the +** memory required by the sub-vdbe at runtime. +** +** P4 is a pointer to the VM containing the trigger program. +** +** If P5 is non-zero, then recursive program invocation is enabled. +*/ +case OP_Program: { /* jump */ + int nMem; /* Number of memory registers for sub-program */ + int nByte; /* Bytes of runtime space required for sub-program */ + Mem *pRt; /* Register to allocate runtime space */ + Mem *pMem; /* Used to iterate through memory cells */ + Mem *pEnd; /* Last memory cell in new array */ + VdbeFrame *pFrame; /* New vdbe frame to execute in */ + SubProgram *pProgram; /* Sub-program to execute */ + void *t; /* Token identifying trigger */ + + pProgram = pOp->p4.pProgram; + pRt = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + assert( pProgram->nOp>0 ); + + /* If the p5 flag is clear, then recursive invocation of triggers is + ** disabled for backwards compatibility (p5 is set if this sub-program + ** is really a trigger, not a foreign key action, and the flag set + ** and cleared by the "PRAGMA recursive_triggers" command is clear). + ** + ** It is recursive invocation of triggers, at the SQL level, that is + ** disabled. In some cases a single trigger may generate more than one + ** SubProgram (if the trigger may be executed with more than one different + ** ON CONFLICT algorithm). SubProgram structures associated with a + ** single trigger all have the same value for the SubProgram.token + ** variable. */ + if( pOp->p5 ){ + t = pProgram->token; + for(pFrame=p->pFrame; pFrame && pFrame->token!=t; pFrame=pFrame->pParent); + if( pFrame ) break; + } + + if( p->nFrame>=db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_TRIGGER_DEPTH] ){ + rc = SQLITE_ERROR; + sqlite3VdbeError(p, "too many levels of trigger recursion"); + goto abort_due_to_error; + } + + /* Register pRt is used to store the memory required to save the state + ** of the current program, and the memory required at runtime to execute + ** the trigger program. If this trigger has been fired before, then pRt + ** is already allocated. Otherwise, it must be initialized. */ + if( (pRt->flags&MEM_Blob)==0 ){ + /* SubProgram.nMem is set to the number of memory cells used by the + ** program stored in SubProgram.aOp. As well as these, one memory + ** cell is required for each cursor used by the program. Set local + ** variable nMem (and later, VdbeFrame.nChildMem) to this value. + */ + nMem = pProgram->nMem + pProgram->nCsr; + assert( nMem>0 ); + if( pProgram->nCsr==0 ) nMem++; + nByte = ROUND8(sizeof(VdbeFrame)) + + nMem * sizeof(Mem) + + pProgram->nCsr * sizeof(VdbeCursor*) + + (pProgram->nOp + 7)/8; + pFrame = sqlite3DbMallocZero(db, nByte); + if( !pFrame ){ + goto no_mem; + } + sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(pRt); + pRt->flags = MEM_Blob|MEM_Dyn; + pRt->z = (char*)pFrame; + pRt->n = nByte; + pRt->xDel = sqlite3VdbeFrameMemDel; + + pFrame->v = p; + pFrame->nChildMem = nMem; + pFrame->nChildCsr = pProgram->nCsr; + pFrame->pc = (int)(pOp - aOp); + pFrame->aMem = p->aMem; + pFrame->nMem = p->nMem; + pFrame->apCsr = p->apCsr; + pFrame->nCursor = p->nCursor; + pFrame->aOp = p->aOp; + pFrame->nOp = p->nOp; + pFrame->token = pProgram->token; +#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS + pFrame->anExec = p->anExec; +#endif +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + pFrame->iFrameMagic = SQLITE_FRAME_MAGIC; +#endif + + pEnd = &VdbeFrameMem(pFrame)[pFrame->nChildMem]; + for(pMem=VdbeFrameMem(pFrame); pMem!=pEnd; pMem++){ + pMem->flags = MEM_Undefined; + pMem->db = db; + } + }else{ + pFrame = (VdbeFrame*)pRt->z; + assert( pRt->xDel==sqlite3VdbeFrameMemDel ); + assert( pProgram->nMem+pProgram->nCsr==pFrame->nChildMem + || (pProgram->nCsr==0 && pProgram->nMem+1==pFrame->nChildMem) ); + assert( pProgram->nCsr==pFrame->nChildCsr ); + assert( (int)(pOp - aOp)==pFrame->pc ); + } + + p->nFrame++; + pFrame->pParent = p->pFrame; + pFrame->lastRowid = db->lastRowid; + pFrame->nChange = p->nChange; + pFrame->nDbChange = p->db->nChange; + assert( pFrame->pAuxData==0 ); + pFrame->pAuxData = p->pAuxData; + p->pAuxData = 0; + p->nChange = 0; + p->pFrame = pFrame; + p->aMem = aMem = VdbeFrameMem(pFrame); + p->nMem = pFrame->nChildMem; + p->nCursor = (u16)pFrame->nChildCsr; + p->apCsr = (VdbeCursor **)&aMem[p->nMem]; + pFrame->aOnce = (u8*)&p->apCsr[pProgram->nCsr]; + memset(pFrame->aOnce, 0, (pProgram->nOp + 7)/8); + p->aOp = aOp = pProgram->aOp; + p->nOp = pProgram->nOp; +#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS + p->anExec = 0; +#endif +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + /* Verify that second and subsequent executions of the same trigger do not + ** try to reuse register values from the first use. */ + { + int i; + for(i=0; i<p->nMem; i++){ + aMem[i].pScopyFrom = 0; /* Prevent false-positive AboutToChange() errs */ + MemSetTypeFlag(&aMem[i], MEM_Undefined); /* Fault if this reg is reused */ + } + } +#endif + pOp = &aOp[-1]; + goto check_for_interrupt; +} + +/* Opcode: Param P1 P2 * * * +** +** This opcode is only ever present in sub-programs called via the +** OP_Program instruction. Copy a value currently stored in a memory +** cell of the calling (parent) frame to cell P2 in the current frames +** address space. This is used by trigger programs to access the new.* +** and old.* values. +** +** The address of the cell in the parent frame is determined by adding +** the value of the P1 argument to the value of the P1 argument to the +** calling OP_Program instruction. +*/ +case OP_Param: { /* out2 */ + VdbeFrame *pFrame; + Mem *pIn; + pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); + pFrame = p->pFrame; + pIn = &pFrame->aMem[pOp->p1 + pFrame->aOp[pFrame->pc].p1]; + sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pOut, pIn, MEM_Ephem); + break; +} + +#endif /* #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER */ + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY +/* Opcode: FkCounter P1 P2 * * * +** Synopsis: fkctr[P1]+=P2 +** +** Increment a "constraint counter" by P2 (P2 may be negative or positive). +** If P1 is non-zero, the database constraint counter is incremented +** (deferred foreign key constraints). Otherwise, if P1 is zero, the +** statement counter is incremented (immediate foreign key constraints). +*/ +case OP_FkCounter: { + if( db->flags & SQLITE_DeferFKs ){ + db->nDeferredImmCons += pOp->p2; + }else if( pOp->p1 ){ + db->nDeferredCons += pOp->p2; + }else{ + p->nFkConstraint += pOp->p2; + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: FkIfZero P1 P2 * * * +** Synopsis: if fkctr[P1]==0 goto P2 +** +** This opcode tests if a foreign key constraint-counter is currently zero. +** If so, jump to instruction P2. Otherwise, fall through to the next +** instruction. +** +** If P1 is non-zero, then the jump is taken if the database constraint-counter +** is zero (the one that counts deferred constraint violations). If P1 is +** zero, the jump is taken if the statement constraint-counter is zero +** (immediate foreign key constraint violations). +*/ +case OP_FkIfZero: { /* jump */ + if( pOp->p1 ){ + VdbeBranchTaken(db->nDeferredCons==0 && db->nDeferredImmCons==0, 2); + if( db->nDeferredCons==0 && db->nDeferredImmCons==0 ) goto jump_to_p2; + }else{ + VdbeBranchTaken(p->nFkConstraint==0 && db->nDeferredImmCons==0, 2); + if( p->nFkConstraint==0 && db->nDeferredImmCons==0 ) goto jump_to_p2; + } + break; +} +#endif /* #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY */ + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINCREMENT +/* Opcode: MemMax P1 P2 * * * +** Synopsis: r[P1]=max(r[P1],r[P2]) +** +** P1 is a register in the root frame of this VM (the root frame is +** different from the current frame if this instruction is being executed +** within a sub-program). Set the value of register P1 to the maximum of +** its current value and the value in register P2. +** +** This instruction throws an error if the memory cell is not initially +** an integer. +*/ +case OP_MemMax: { /* in2 */ + VdbeFrame *pFrame; + if( p->pFrame ){ + for(pFrame=p->pFrame; pFrame->pParent; pFrame=pFrame->pParent); + pIn1 = &pFrame->aMem[pOp->p1]; + }else{ + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + } + assert( memIsValid(pIn1) ); + sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pIn1); + pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2]; + sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pIn2); + if( pIn1->u.i<pIn2->u.i){ + pIn1->u.i = pIn2->u.i; + } + break; +} +#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINCREMENT */ + +/* Opcode: IfPos P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: if r[P1]>0 then r[P1]-=P3, goto P2 +** +** Register P1 must contain an integer. +** If the value of register P1 is 1 or greater, subtract P3 from the +** value in P1 and jump to P2. +** +** If the initial value of register P1 is less than 1, then the +** value is unchanged and control passes through to the next instruction. +*/ +case OP_IfPos: { /* jump, in1 */ + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + assert( pIn1->flags&MEM_Int ); + VdbeBranchTaken( pIn1->u.i>0, 2); + if( pIn1->u.i>0 ){ + pIn1->u.i -= pOp->p3; + goto jump_to_p2; + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: OffsetLimit P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: if r[P1]>0 then r[P2]=r[P1]+max(0,r[P3]) else r[P2]=(-1) +** +** This opcode performs a commonly used computation associated with +** LIMIT and OFFSET processing. r[P1] holds the limit counter. r[P3] +** holds the offset counter. The opcode computes the combined value +** of the LIMIT and OFFSET and stores that value in r[P2]. The r[P2] +** value computed is the total number of rows that will need to be +** visited in order to complete the query. +** +** If r[P3] is zero or negative, that means there is no OFFSET +** and r[P2] is set to be the value of the LIMIT, r[P1]. +** +** if r[P1] is zero or negative, that means there is no LIMIT +** and r[P2] is set to -1. +** +** Otherwise, r[P2] is set to the sum of r[P1] and r[P3]. +*/ +case OP_OffsetLimit: { /* in1, out2, in3 */ + i64 x; + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); + assert( pIn1->flags & MEM_Int ); + assert( pIn3->flags & MEM_Int ); + x = pIn1->u.i; + if( x<=0 || sqlite3AddInt64(&x, pIn3->u.i>0?pIn3->u.i:0) ){ + /* If the LIMIT is less than or equal to zero, loop forever. This + ** is documented. But also, if the LIMIT+OFFSET exceeds 2^63 then + ** also loop forever. This is undocumented. In fact, one could argue + ** that the loop should terminate. But assuming 1 billion iterations + ** per second (far exceeding the capabilities of any current hardware) + ** it would take nearly 300 years to actually reach the limit. So + ** looping forever is a reasonable approximation. */ + pOut->u.i = -1; + }else{ + pOut->u.i = x; + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: IfNotZero P1 P2 * * * +** Synopsis: if r[P1]!=0 then r[P1]--, goto P2 +** +** Register P1 must contain an integer. If the content of register P1 is +** initially greater than zero, then decrement the value in register P1. +** If it is non-zero (negative or positive) and then also jump to P2. +** If register P1 is initially zero, leave it unchanged and fall through. +*/ +case OP_IfNotZero: { /* jump, in1 */ + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + assert( pIn1->flags&MEM_Int ); + VdbeBranchTaken(pIn1->u.i<0, 2); + if( pIn1->u.i ){ + if( pIn1->u.i>0 ) pIn1->u.i--; + goto jump_to_p2; + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: DecrJumpZero P1 P2 * * * +** Synopsis: if (--r[P1])==0 goto P2 +** +** Register P1 must hold an integer. Decrement the value in P1 +** and jump to P2 if the new value is exactly zero. +*/ +case OP_DecrJumpZero: { /* jump, in1 */ + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + assert( pIn1->flags&MEM_Int ); + if( pIn1->u.i>SMALLEST_INT64 ) pIn1->u.i--; + VdbeBranchTaken(pIn1->u.i==0, 2); + if( pIn1->u.i==0 ) goto jump_to_p2; + break; +} + + +/* Opcode: AggStep * P2 P3 P4 P5 +** Synopsis: accum=r[P3] step(r[P2@P5]) +** +** Execute the xStep function for an aggregate. +** The function has P5 arguments. P4 is a pointer to the +** FuncDef structure that specifies the function. Register P3 is the +** accumulator. +** +** The P5 arguments are taken from register P2 and its +** successors. +*/ +/* Opcode: AggInverse * P2 P3 P4 P5 +** Synopsis: accum=r[P3] inverse(r[P2@P5]) +** +** Execute the xInverse function for an aggregate. +** The function has P5 arguments. P4 is a pointer to the +** FuncDef structure that specifies the function. Register P3 is the +** accumulator. +** +** The P5 arguments are taken from register P2 and its +** successors. +*/ +/* Opcode: AggStep1 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 +** Synopsis: accum=r[P3] step(r[P2@P5]) +** +** Execute the xStep (if P1==0) or xInverse (if P1!=0) function for an +** aggregate. The function has P5 arguments. P4 is a pointer to the +** FuncDef structure that specifies the function. Register P3 is the +** accumulator. +** +** The P5 arguments are taken from register P2 and its +** successors. +** +** This opcode is initially coded as OP_AggStep0. On first evaluation, +** the FuncDef stored in P4 is converted into an sqlite3_context and +** the opcode is changed. In this way, the initialization of the +** sqlite3_context only happens once, instead of on each call to the +** step function. +*/ +case OP_AggInverse: +case OP_AggStep: { + int n; + sqlite3_context *pCtx; + + assert( pOp->p4type==P4_FUNCDEF ); + n = pOp->p5; + assert( pOp->p3>0 && pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); + assert( n==0 || (pOp->p2>0 && pOp->p2+n<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1) ); + assert( pOp->p3<pOp->p2 || pOp->p3>=pOp->p2+n ); + pCtx = sqlite3DbMallocRawNN(db, n*sizeof(sqlite3_value*) + + (sizeof(pCtx[0]) + sizeof(Mem) - sizeof(sqlite3_value*))); + if( pCtx==0 ) goto no_mem; + pCtx->pMem = 0; + pCtx->pOut = (Mem*)&(pCtx->argv[n]); + sqlite3VdbeMemInit(pCtx->pOut, db, MEM_Null); + pCtx->pFunc = pOp->p4.pFunc; + pCtx->iOp = (int)(pOp - aOp); + pCtx->pVdbe = p; + pCtx->skipFlag = 0; + pCtx->isError = 0; + pCtx->enc = encoding; + pCtx->argc = n; + pOp->p4type = P4_FUNCCTX; + pOp->p4.pCtx = pCtx; + + /* OP_AggInverse must have P1==1 and OP_AggStep must have P1==0 */ + assert( pOp->p1==(pOp->opcode==OP_AggInverse) ); + + pOp->opcode = OP_AggStep1; + /* Fall through into OP_AggStep */ + /* no break */ deliberate_fall_through +} +case OP_AggStep1: { + int i; + sqlite3_context *pCtx; + Mem *pMem; + + assert( pOp->p4type==P4_FUNCCTX ); + pCtx = pOp->p4.pCtx; + pMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + if( pOp->p1 ){ + /* This is an OP_AggInverse call. Verify that xStep has always + ** been called at least once prior to any xInverse call. */ + assert( pMem->uTemp==0x1122e0e3 ); + }else{ + /* This is an OP_AggStep call. Mark it as such. */ + pMem->uTemp = 0x1122e0e3; + } +#endif + + /* If this function is inside of a trigger, the register array in aMem[] + ** might change from one evaluation to the next. The next block of code + ** checks to see if the register array has changed, and if so it + ** reinitializes the relavant parts of the sqlite3_context object */ + if( pCtx->pMem != pMem ){ + pCtx->pMem = pMem; + for(i=pCtx->argc-1; i>=0; i--) pCtx->argv[i] = &aMem[pOp->p2+i]; + } + +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + for(i=0; i<pCtx->argc; i++){ + assert( memIsValid(pCtx->argv[i]) ); + REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2+i, pCtx->argv[i]); + } +#endif + + pMem->n++; + assert( pCtx->pOut->flags==MEM_Null ); + assert( pCtx->isError==0 ); + assert( pCtx->skipFlag==0 ); +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WINDOWFUNC + if( pOp->p1 ){ + (pCtx->pFunc->xInverse)(pCtx,pCtx->argc,pCtx->argv); + }else +#endif + (pCtx->pFunc->xSFunc)(pCtx,pCtx->argc,pCtx->argv); /* IMP: R-24505-23230 */ + + if( pCtx->isError ){ + if( pCtx->isError>0 ){ + sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", sqlite3_value_text(pCtx->pOut)); + rc = pCtx->isError; + } + if( pCtx->skipFlag ){ + assert( pOp[-1].opcode==OP_CollSeq ); + i = pOp[-1].p1; + if( i ) sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(&aMem[i], 1); + pCtx->skipFlag = 0; + } + sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(pCtx->pOut); + pCtx->pOut->flags = MEM_Null; + pCtx->isError = 0; + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + } + assert( pCtx->pOut->flags==MEM_Null ); + assert( pCtx->skipFlag==0 ); + break; +} + +/* Opcode: AggFinal P1 P2 * P4 * +** Synopsis: accum=r[P1] N=P2 +** +** P1 is the memory location that is the accumulator for an aggregate +** or window function. Execute the finalizer function +** for an aggregate and store the result in P1. +** +** P2 is the number of arguments that the step function takes and +** P4 is a pointer to the FuncDef for this function. The P2 +** argument is not used by this opcode. It is only there to disambiguate +** functions that can take varying numbers of arguments. The +** P4 argument is only needed for the case where +** the step function was not previously called. +*/ +/* Opcode: AggValue * P2 P3 P4 * +** Synopsis: r[P3]=value N=P2 +** +** Invoke the xValue() function and store the result in register P3. +** +** P2 is the number of arguments that the step function takes and +** P4 is a pointer to the FuncDef for this function. The P2 +** argument is not used by this opcode. It is only there to disambiguate +** functions that can take varying numbers of arguments. The +** P4 argument is only needed for the case where +** the step function was not previously called. +*/ +case OP_AggValue: +case OP_AggFinal: { + Mem *pMem; + assert( pOp->p1>0 && pOp->p1<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); + assert( pOp->p3==0 || pOp->opcode==OP_AggValue ); + pMem = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + assert( (pMem->flags & ~(MEM_Null|MEM_Agg))==0 ); +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WINDOWFUNC + if( pOp->p3 ){ + memAboutToChange(p, &aMem[pOp->p3]); + rc = sqlite3VdbeMemAggValue(pMem, &aMem[pOp->p3], pOp->p4.pFunc); + pMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + }else +#endif + { + rc = sqlite3VdbeMemFinalize(pMem, pOp->p4.pFunc); + } + + if( rc ){ + sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", sqlite3_value_text(pMem)); + goto abort_due_to_error; + } + sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pMem, encoding); + UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pMem); + break; +} + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL +/* Opcode: Checkpoint P1 P2 P3 * * +** +** Checkpoint database P1. This is a no-op if P1 is not currently in +** WAL mode. Parameter P2 is one of SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE, FULL, +** RESTART, or TRUNCATE. Write 1 or 0 into mem[P3] if the checkpoint returns +** SQLITE_BUSY or not, respectively. Write the number of pages in the +** WAL after the checkpoint into mem[P3+1] and the number of pages +** in the WAL that have been checkpointed after the checkpoint +** completes into mem[P3+2]. However on an error, mem[P3+1] and +** mem[P3+2] are initialized to -1. +*/ +case OP_Checkpoint: { + int i; /* Loop counter */ + int aRes[3]; /* Results */ + Mem *pMem; /* Write results here */ + + assert( p->readOnly==0 ); + aRes[0] = 0; + aRes[1] = aRes[2] = -1; + assert( pOp->p2==SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE + || pOp->p2==SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_FULL + || pOp->p2==SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_RESTART + || pOp->p2==SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_TRUNCATE + ); + rc = sqlite3Checkpoint(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p2, &aRes[1], &aRes[2]); + if( rc ){ + if( rc!=SQLITE_BUSY ) goto abort_due_to_error; + rc = SQLITE_OK; + aRes[0] = 1; + } + for(i=0, pMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; i<3; i++, pMem++){ + sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem, (i64)aRes[i]); + } + break; +}; +#endif + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PRAGMA +/* Opcode: JournalMode P1 P2 P3 * * +** +** Change the journal mode of database P1 to P3. P3 must be one of the +** PAGER_JOURNALMODE_XXX values. If changing between the various rollback +** modes (delete, truncate, persist, off and memory), this is a simple +** operation. No IO is required. +** +** If changing into or out of WAL mode the procedure is more complicated. +** +** Write a string containing the final journal-mode to register P2. +*/ +case OP_JournalMode: { /* out2 */ + Btree *pBt; /* Btree to change journal mode of */ + Pager *pPager; /* Pager associated with pBt */ + int eNew; /* New journal mode */ + int eOld; /* The old journal mode */ +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL + const char *zFilename; /* Name of database file for pPager */ +#endif + + pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); + eNew = pOp->p3; + assert( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE + || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE + || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST + || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF + || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY + || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL + || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_QUERY + ); + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb ); + assert( p->readOnly==0 ); + + pBt = db->aDb[pOp->p1].pBt; + pPager = sqlite3BtreePager(pBt); + eOld = sqlite3PagerGetJournalMode(pPager); + if( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_QUERY ) eNew = eOld; + assert( sqlite3BtreeHoldsMutex(pBt) ); + if( !sqlite3PagerOkToChangeJournalMode(pPager) ) eNew = eOld; + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL + zFilename = sqlite3PagerFilename(pPager, 1); + + /* Do not allow a transition to journal_mode=WAL for a database + ** in temporary storage or if the VFS does not support shared memory + */ + if( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL + && (sqlite3Strlen30(zFilename)==0 /* Temp file */ + || !sqlite3PagerWalSupported(pPager)) /* No shared-memory support */ + ){ + eNew = eOld; + } + + if( (eNew!=eOld) + && (eOld==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL) + ){ + if( !db->autoCommit || db->nVdbeRead>1 ){ + rc = SQLITE_ERROR; + sqlite3VdbeError(p, + "cannot change %s wal mode from within a transaction", + (eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ? "into" : "out of") + ); + goto abort_due_to_error; + }else{ + + if( eOld==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ){ + /* If leaving WAL mode, close the log file. If successful, the call + ** to PagerCloseWal() checkpoints and deletes the write-ahead-log + ** file. An EXCLUSIVE lock may still be held on the database file + ** after a successful return. + */ + rc = sqlite3PagerCloseWal(pPager, db); + if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ + sqlite3PagerSetJournalMode(pPager, eNew); + } + }else if( eOld==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY ){ + /* Cannot transition directly from MEMORY to WAL. Use mode OFF + ** as an intermediate */ + sqlite3PagerSetJournalMode(pPager, PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF); + } + + /* Open a transaction on the database file. Regardless of the journal + ** mode, this transaction always uses a rollback journal. + */ + assert( sqlite3BtreeTxnState(pBt)!=SQLITE_TXN_WRITE ); + if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ + rc = sqlite3BtreeSetVersion(pBt, (eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ? 2 : 1)); + } + } + } +#endif /* ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL */ + + if( rc ) eNew = eOld; + eNew = sqlite3PagerSetJournalMode(pPager, eNew); + + pOut->flags = MEM_Str|MEM_Static|MEM_Term; + pOut->z = (char *)sqlite3JournalModename(eNew); + pOut->n = sqlite3Strlen30(pOut->z); + pOut->enc = SQLITE_UTF8; + sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pOut, encoding); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + break; +}; +#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_PRAGMA */ + +#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VACUUM) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ATTACH) +/* Opcode: Vacuum P1 P2 * * * +** +** Vacuum the entire database P1. P1 is 0 for "main", and 2 or more +** for an attached database. The "temp" database may not be vacuumed. +** +** If P2 is not zero, then it is a register holding a string which is +** the file into which the result of vacuum should be written. When +** P2 is zero, the vacuum overwrites the original database. +*/ +case OP_Vacuum: { + assert( p->readOnly==0 ); + rc = sqlite3RunVacuum(&p->zErrMsg, db, pOp->p1, + pOp->p2 ? &aMem[pOp->p2] : 0); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + break; +} +#endif + +#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM) +/* Opcode: IncrVacuum P1 P2 * * * +** +** Perform a single step of the incremental vacuum procedure on +** the P1 database. If the vacuum has finished, jump to instruction +** P2. Otherwise, fall through to the next instruction. +*/ +case OP_IncrVacuum: { /* jump */ + Btree *pBt; + + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb ); + assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p1) ); + assert( p->readOnly==0 ); + pBt = db->aDb[pOp->p1].pBt; + rc = sqlite3BtreeIncrVacuum(pBt); + VdbeBranchTaken(rc==SQLITE_DONE,2); + if( rc ){ + if( rc!=SQLITE_DONE ) goto abort_due_to_error; + rc = SQLITE_OK; + goto jump_to_p2; + } + break; +} +#endif + +/* Opcode: Expire P1 P2 * * * +** +** Cause precompiled statements to expire. When an expired statement +** is executed using sqlite3_step() it will either automatically +** reprepare itself (if it was originally created using sqlite3_prepare_v2()) +** or it will fail with SQLITE_SCHEMA. +** +** If P1 is 0, then all SQL statements become expired. If P1 is non-zero, +** then only the currently executing statement is expired. +** +** If P2 is 0, then SQL statements are expired immediately. If P2 is 1, +** then running SQL statements are allowed to continue to run to completion. +** The P2==1 case occurs when a CREATE INDEX or similar schema change happens +** that might help the statement run faster but which does not affect the +** correctness of operation. +*/ +case OP_Expire: { + assert( pOp->p2==0 || pOp->p2==1 ); + if( !pOp->p1 ){ + sqlite3ExpirePreparedStatements(db, pOp->p2); + }else{ + p->expired = pOp->p2+1; + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: CursorLock P1 * * * * +** +** Lock the btree to which cursor P1 is pointing so that the btree cannot be +** written by an other cursor. +*/ +case OP_CursorLock: { + VdbeCursor *pC; + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( pC!=0 ); + assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); + sqlite3BtreeCursorPin(pC->uc.pCursor); + break; +} + +/* Opcode: CursorUnlock P1 * * * * +** +** Unlock the btree to which cursor P1 is pointing so that it can be +** written by other cursors. +*/ +case OP_CursorUnlock: { + VdbeCursor *pC; + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( pC!=0 ); + assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); + sqlite3BtreeCursorUnpin(pC->uc.pCursor); + break; +} + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE +/* Opcode: TableLock P1 P2 P3 P4 * +** Synopsis: iDb=P1 root=P2 write=P3 +** +** Obtain a lock on a particular table. This instruction is only used when +** the shared-cache feature is enabled. +** +** P1 is the index of the database in sqlite3.aDb[] of the database +** on which the lock is acquired. A readlock is obtained if P3==0 or +** a write lock if P3==1. +** +** P2 contains the root-page of the table to lock. +** +** P4 contains a pointer to the name of the table being locked. This is only +** used to generate an error message if the lock cannot be obtained. +*/ +case OP_TableLock: { + u8 isWriteLock = (u8)pOp->p3; + if( isWriteLock || 0==(db->flags&SQLITE_ReadUncommit) ){ + int p1 = pOp->p1; + assert( p1>=0 && p1<db->nDb ); + assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, p1) ); + assert( isWriteLock==0 || isWriteLock==1 ); + rc = sqlite3BtreeLockTable(db->aDb[p1].pBt, pOp->p2, isWriteLock); + if( rc ){ + if( (rc&0xFF)==SQLITE_LOCKED ){ + const char *z = pOp->p4.z; + sqlite3VdbeError(p, "database table is locked: %s", z); + } + goto abort_due_to_error; + } + } + break; +} +#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE */ + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE +/* Opcode: VBegin * * * P4 * +** +** P4 may be a pointer to an sqlite3_vtab structure. If so, call the +** xBegin method for that table. +** +** Also, whether or not P4 is set, check that this is not being called from +** within a callback to a virtual table xSync() method. If it is, the error +** code will be set to SQLITE_LOCKED. +*/ +case OP_VBegin: { + VTable *pVTab; + pVTab = pOp->p4.pVtab; + rc = sqlite3VtabBegin(db, pVTab); + if( pVTab ) sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVTab->pVtab); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + break; +} +#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE +/* Opcode: VCreate P1 P2 * * * +** +** P2 is a register that holds the name of a virtual table in database +** P1. Call the xCreate method for that table. +*/ +case OP_VCreate: { + Mem sMem; /* For storing the record being decoded */ + const char *zTab; /* Name of the virtual table */ + + memset(&sMem, 0, sizeof(sMem)); + sMem.db = db; + /* Because P2 is always a static string, it is impossible for the + ** sqlite3VdbeMemCopy() to fail */ + assert( (aMem[pOp->p2].flags & MEM_Str)!=0 ); + assert( (aMem[pOp->p2].flags & MEM_Static)!=0 ); + rc = sqlite3VdbeMemCopy(&sMem, &aMem[pOp->p2]); + assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); + zTab = (const char*)sqlite3_value_text(&sMem); + assert( zTab || db->mallocFailed ); + if( zTab ){ + rc = sqlite3VtabCallCreate(db, pOp->p1, zTab, &p->zErrMsg); + } + sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(&sMem); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + break; +} +#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE +/* Opcode: VDestroy P1 * * P4 * +** +** P4 is the name of a virtual table in database P1. Call the xDestroy method +** of that table. +*/ +case OP_VDestroy: { + db->nVDestroy++; + rc = sqlite3VtabCallDestroy(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p4.z); + db->nVDestroy--; + assert( p->errorAction==OE_Abort && p->usesStmtJournal ); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + break; +} +#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE +/* Opcode: VOpen P1 * * P4 * +** +** P4 is a pointer to a virtual table object, an sqlite3_vtab structure. +** P1 is a cursor number. This opcode opens a cursor to the virtual +** table and stores that cursor in P1. +*/ +case OP_VOpen: { + VdbeCursor *pCur; + sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVCur; + sqlite3_vtab *pVtab; + const sqlite3_module *pModule; + + assert( p->bIsReader ); + pCur = 0; + pVCur = 0; + pVtab = pOp->p4.pVtab->pVtab; + if( pVtab==0 || NEVER(pVtab->pModule==0) ){ + rc = SQLITE_LOCKED; + goto abort_due_to_error; + } + pModule = pVtab->pModule; + rc = pModule->xOpen(pVtab, &pVCur); + sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + + /* Initialize sqlite3_vtab_cursor base class */ + pVCur->pVtab = pVtab; + + /* Initialize vdbe cursor object */ + pCur = allocateCursor(p, pOp->p1, 0, CURTYPE_VTAB); + if( pCur ){ + pCur->uc.pVCur = pVCur; + pVtab->nRef++; + }else{ + assert( db->mallocFailed ); + pModule->xClose(pVCur); + goto no_mem; + } + break; +} +#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE +/* Opcode: VInitIn P1 P2 P3 * * +** Synopsis: r[P2]=ValueList(P1,P3) +** +** Set register P2 to be a pointer to a ValueList object for cursor P1 +** with cache register P3 and output register P3+1. This ValueList object +** can be used as the first argument to sqlite3_vtab_in_first() and +** sqlite3_vtab_in_next() to extract all of the values stored in the P1 +** cursor. Register P3 is used to hold the values returned by +** sqlite3_vtab_in_first() and sqlite3_vtab_in_next(). +*/ +case OP_VInitIn: { /* out2 */ + VdbeCursor *pC; /* The cursor containing the RHS values */ + ValueList *pRhs; /* New ValueList object to put in reg[P2] */ + + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + pRhs = sqlite3_malloc64( sizeof(*pRhs) ); + if( pRhs==0 ) goto no_mem; + pRhs->pCsr = pC->uc.pCursor; + pRhs->pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); + pOut->flags = MEM_Null; + sqlite3VdbeMemSetPointer(pOut, pRhs, "ValueList", sqlite3_free); + break; +} +#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ + + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE +/* Opcode: VFilter P1 P2 P3 P4 * +** Synopsis: iplan=r[P3] zplan='P4' +** +** P1 is a cursor opened using VOpen. P2 is an address to jump to if +** the filtered result set is empty. +** +** P4 is either NULL or a string that was generated by the xBestIndex +** method of the module. The interpretation of the P4 string is left +** to the module implementation. +** +** This opcode invokes the xFilter method on the virtual table specified +** by P1. The integer query plan parameter to xFilter is stored in register +** P3. Register P3+1 stores the argc parameter to be passed to the +** xFilter method. Registers P3+2..P3+1+argc are the argc +** additional parameters which are passed to +** xFilter as argv. Register P3+2 becomes argv[0] when passed to xFilter. +** +** A jump is made to P2 if the result set after filtering would be empty. +*/ +case OP_VFilter: { /* jump */ + int nArg; + int iQuery; + const sqlite3_module *pModule; + Mem *pQuery; + Mem *pArgc; + sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVCur; + sqlite3_vtab *pVtab; + VdbeCursor *pCur; + int res; + int i; + Mem **apArg; + + pQuery = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + pArgc = &pQuery[1]; + pCur = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( memIsValid(pQuery) ); + REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pQuery); + assert( pCur!=0 ); + assert( pCur->eCurType==CURTYPE_VTAB ); + pVCur = pCur->uc.pVCur; + pVtab = pVCur->pVtab; + pModule = pVtab->pModule; + + /* Grab the index number and argc parameters */ + assert( (pQuery->flags&MEM_Int)!=0 && pArgc->flags==MEM_Int ); + nArg = (int)pArgc->u.i; + iQuery = (int)pQuery->u.i; + + /* Invoke the xFilter method */ + apArg = p->apArg; + for(i = 0; i<nArg; i++){ + apArg[i] = &pArgc[i+1]; + } + rc = pModule->xFilter(pVCur, iQuery, pOp->p4.z, nArg, apArg); + sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + res = pModule->xEof(pVCur); + pCur->nullRow = 0; + VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0,2); + if( res ) goto jump_to_p2; + break; +} +#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE +/* Opcode: VColumn P1 P2 P3 * P5 +** Synopsis: r[P3]=vcolumn(P2) +** +** Store in register P3 the value of the P2-th column of +** the current row of the virtual-table of cursor P1. +** +** If the VColumn opcode is being used to fetch the value of +** an unchanging column during an UPDATE operation, then the P5 +** value is OPFLAG_NOCHNG. This will cause the sqlite3_vtab_nochange() +** function to return true inside the xColumn method of the virtual +** table implementation. The P5 column might also contain other +** bits (OPFLAG_LENGTHARG or OPFLAG_TYPEOFARG) but those bits are +** unused by OP_VColumn. +*/ +case OP_VColumn: { + sqlite3_vtab *pVtab; + const sqlite3_module *pModule; + Mem *pDest; + sqlite3_context sContext; + + VdbeCursor *pCur = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( pCur!=0 ); + assert( pOp->p3>0 && pOp->p3<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); + pDest = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + memAboutToChange(p, pDest); + if( pCur->nullRow ){ + sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pDest); + break; + } + assert( pCur->eCurType==CURTYPE_VTAB ); + pVtab = pCur->uc.pVCur->pVtab; + pModule = pVtab->pModule; + assert( pModule->xColumn ); + memset(&sContext, 0, sizeof(sContext)); + sContext.pOut = pDest; + sContext.enc = encoding; + assert( pOp->p5==OPFLAG_NOCHNG || pOp->p5==0 ); + if( pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_NOCHNG ){ + sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pDest); + pDest->flags = MEM_Null|MEM_Zero; + pDest->u.nZero = 0; + }else{ + MemSetTypeFlag(pDest, MEM_Null); + } + rc = pModule->xColumn(pCur->uc.pVCur, &sContext, pOp->p2); + sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab); + if( sContext.isError>0 ){ + sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", sqlite3_value_text(pDest)); + rc = sContext.isError; + } + sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pDest, encoding); + REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pDest); + UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pDest); + + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + break; +} +#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE +/* Opcode: VNext P1 P2 * * * +** +** Advance virtual table P1 to the next row in its result set and +** jump to instruction P2. Or, if the virtual table has reached +** the end of its result set, then fall through to the next instruction. +*/ +case OP_VNext: { /* jump */ + sqlite3_vtab *pVtab; + const sqlite3_module *pModule; + int res; + VdbeCursor *pCur; + + pCur = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + assert( pCur!=0 ); + assert( pCur->eCurType==CURTYPE_VTAB ); + if( pCur->nullRow ){ + break; + } + pVtab = pCur->uc.pVCur->pVtab; + pModule = pVtab->pModule; + assert( pModule->xNext ); + + /* Invoke the xNext() method of the module. There is no way for the + ** underlying implementation to return an error if one occurs during + ** xNext(). Instead, if an error occurs, true is returned (indicating that + ** data is available) and the error code returned when xColumn or + ** some other method is next invoked on the save virtual table cursor. + */ + rc = pModule->xNext(pCur->uc.pVCur); + sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + res = pModule->xEof(pCur->uc.pVCur); + VdbeBranchTaken(!res,2); + if( !res ){ + /* If there is data, jump to P2 */ + goto jump_to_p2_and_check_for_interrupt; + } + goto check_for_interrupt; +} +#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE +/* Opcode: VRename P1 * * P4 * +** +** P4 is a pointer to a virtual table object, an sqlite3_vtab structure. +** This opcode invokes the corresponding xRename method. The value +** in register P1 is passed as the zName argument to the xRename method. +*/ +case OP_VRename: { + sqlite3_vtab *pVtab; + Mem *pName; + int isLegacy; + + isLegacy = (db->flags & SQLITE_LegacyAlter); + db->flags |= SQLITE_LegacyAlter; + pVtab = pOp->p4.pVtab->pVtab; + pName = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + assert( pVtab->pModule->xRename ); + assert( memIsValid(pName) ); + assert( p->readOnly==0 ); + REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p1, pName); + assert( pName->flags & MEM_Str ); + testcase( pName->enc==SQLITE_UTF8 ); + testcase( pName->enc==SQLITE_UTF16BE ); + testcase( pName->enc==SQLITE_UTF16LE ); + rc = sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pName, SQLITE_UTF8); + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + rc = pVtab->pModule->xRename(pVtab, pName->z); + if( isLegacy==0 ) db->flags &= ~(u64)SQLITE_LegacyAlter; + sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab); + p->expired = 0; + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + break; +} +#endif + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE +/* Opcode: VUpdate P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 +** Synopsis: data=r[P3@P2] +** +** P4 is a pointer to a virtual table object, an sqlite3_vtab structure. +** This opcode invokes the corresponding xUpdate method. P2 values +** are contiguous memory cells starting at P3 to pass to the xUpdate +** invocation. The value in register (P3+P2-1) corresponds to the +** p2th element of the argv array passed to xUpdate. +** +** The xUpdate method will do a DELETE or an INSERT or both. +** The argv[0] element (which corresponds to memory cell P3) +** is the rowid of a row to delete. If argv[0] is NULL then no +** deletion occurs. The argv[1] element is the rowid of the new +** row. This can be NULL to have the virtual table select the new +** rowid for itself. The subsequent elements in the array are +** the values of columns in the new row. +** +** If P2==1 then no insert is performed. argv[0] is the rowid of +** a row to delete. +** +** P1 is a boolean flag. If it is set to true and the xUpdate call +** is successful, then the value returned by sqlite3_last_insert_rowid() +** is set to the value of the rowid for the row just inserted. +** +** P5 is the error actions (OE_Replace, OE_Fail, OE_Ignore, etc) to +** apply in the case of a constraint failure on an insert or update. +*/ +case OP_VUpdate: { + sqlite3_vtab *pVtab; + const sqlite3_module *pModule; + int nArg; + int i; + sqlite_int64 rowid = 0; + Mem **apArg; + Mem *pX; + + assert( pOp->p2==1 || pOp->p5==OE_Fail || pOp->p5==OE_Rollback + || pOp->p5==OE_Abort || pOp->p5==OE_Ignore || pOp->p5==OE_Replace + ); + assert( p->readOnly==0 ); + if( db->mallocFailed ) goto no_mem; + sqlite3VdbeIncrWriteCounter(p, 0); + pVtab = pOp->p4.pVtab->pVtab; + if( pVtab==0 || NEVER(pVtab->pModule==0) ){ + rc = SQLITE_LOCKED; + goto abort_due_to_error; + } + pModule = pVtab->pModule; + nArg = pOp->p2; + assert( pOp->p4type==P4_VTAB ); + if( ALWAYS(pModule->xUpdate) ){ + u8 vtabOnConflict = db->vtabOnConflict; + apArg = p->apArg; + pX = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + for(i=0; i<nArg; i++){ + assert( memIsValid(pX) ); + memAboutToChange(p, pX); + apArg[i] = pX; + pX++; + } + db->vtabOnConflict = pOp->p5; + rc = pModule->xUpdate(pVtab, nArg, apArg, &rowid); + db->vtabOnConflict = vtabOnConflict; + sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab); + if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pOp->p1 ){ + assert( nArg>1 && apArg[0] && (apArg[0]->flags&MEM_Null) ); + db->lastRowid = rowid; + } + if( (rc&0xff)==SQLITE_CONSTRAINT && pOp->p4.pVtab->bConstraint ){ + if( pOp->p5==OE_Ignore ){ + rc = SQLITE_OK; + }else{ + p->errorAction = ((pOp->p5==OE_Replace) ? OE_Abort : pOp->p5); + } + }else{ + p->nChange++; + } + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + } + break; +} +#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PAGER_PRAGMAS +/* Opcode: Pagecount P1 P2 * * * +** +** Write the current number of pages in database P1 to memory cell P2. +*/ +case OP_Pagecount: { /* out2 */ + pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); + pOut->u.i = sqlite3BtreeLastPage(db->aDb[pOp->p1].pBt); + break; +} +#endif + + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PAGER_PRAGMAS +/* Opcode: MaxPgcnt P1 P2 P3 * * +** +** Try to set the maximum page count for database P1 to the value in P3. +** Do not let the maximum page count fall below the current page count and +** do not change the maximum page count value if P3==0. +** +** Store the maximum page count after the change in register P2. +*/ +case OP_MaxPgcnt: { /* out2 */ + unsigned int newMax; + Btree *pBt; + + pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); + pBt = db->aDb[pOp->p1].pBt; + newMax = 0; + if( pOp->p3 ){ + newMax = sqlite3BtreeLastPage(pBt); + if( newMax < (unsigned)pOp->p3 ) newMax = (unsigned)pOp->p3; + } + pOut->u.i = sqlite3BtreeMaxPageCount(pBt, newMax); + break; +} +#endif + +/* Opcode: Function P1 P2 P3 P4 * +** Synopsis: r[P3]=func(r[P2@NP]) +** +** Invoke a user function (P4 is a pointer to an sqlite3_context object that +** contains a pointer to the function to be run) with arguments taken +** from register P2 and successors. The number of arguments is in +** the sqlite3_context object that P4 points to. +** The result of the function is stored +** in register P3. Register P3 must not be one of the function inputs. +** +** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the +** function was determined to be constant at compile time. If the first +** argument was constant then bit 0 of P1 is set. This is used to determine +** whether meta data associated with a user function argument using the +** sqlite3_set_auxdata() API may be safely retained until the next +** invocation of this opcode. +** +** See also: AggStep, AggFinal, PureFunc +*/ +/* Opcode: PureFunc P1 P2 P3 P4 * +** Synopsis: r[P3]=func(r[P2@NP]) +** +** Invoke a user function (P4 is a pointer to an sqlite3_context object that +** contains a pointer to the function to be run) with arguments taken +** from register P2 and successors. The number of arguments is in +** the sqlite3_context object that P4 points to. +** The result of the function is stored +** in register P3. Register P3 must not be one of the function inputs. +** +** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the +** function was determined to be constant at compile time. If the first +** argument was constant then bit 0 of P1 is set. This is used to determine +** whether meta data associated with a user function argument using the +** sqlite3_set_auxdata() API may be safely retained until the next +** invocation of this opcode. +** +** This opcode works exactly like OP_Function. The only difference is in +** its name. This opcode is used in places where the function must be +** purely non-deterministic. Some built-in date/time functions can be +** either determinitic of non-deterministic, depending on their arguments. +** When those function are used in a non-deterministic way, they will check +** to see if they were called using OP_PureFunc instead of OP_Function, and +** if they were, they throw an error. +** +** See also: AggStep, AggFinal, Function +*/ +case OP_PureFunc: /* group */ +case OP_Function: { /* group */ + int i; + sqlite3_context *pCtx; + + assert( pOp->p4type==P4_FUNCCTX ); + pCtx = pOp->p4.pCtx; + + /* If this function is inside of a trigger, the register array in aMem[] + ** might change from one evaluation to the next. The next block of code + ** checks to see if the register array has changed, and if so it + ** reinitializes the relavant parts of the sqlite3_context object */ + pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3]; + if( pCtx->pOut != pOut ){ + pCtx->pVdbe = p; + pCtx->pOut = pOut; + pCtx->enc = encoding; + for(i=pCtx->argc-1; i>=0; i--) pCtx->argv[i] = &aMem[pOp->p2+i]; + } + assert( pCtx->pVdbe==p ); + + memAboutToChange(p, pOut); +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + for(i=0; i<pCtx->argc; i++){ + assert( memIsValid(pCtx->argv[i]) ); + REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2+i, pCtx->argv[i]); + } +#endif + MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Null); + assert( pCtx->isError==0 ); + (*pCtx->pFunc->xSFunc)(pCtx, pCtx->argc, pCtx->argv);/* IMP: R-24505-23230 */ + + /* If the function returned an error, throw an exception */ + if( pCtx->isError ){ + if( pCtx->isError>0 ){ + sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", sqlite3_value_text(pOut)); + rc = pCtx->isError; + } + sqlite3VdbeDeleteAuxData(db, &p->pAuxData, pCtx->iOp, pOp->p1); + pCtx->isError = 0; + if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; + } + + assert( (pOut->flags&MEM_Str)==0 + || pOut->enc==encoding + || db->mallocFailed ); + assert( !sqlite3VdbeMemTooBig(pOut) ); + + REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pOut); + UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pOut); + break; +} + +/* Opcode: ClrSubtype P1 * * * * +** Synopsis: r[P1].subtype = 0 +** +** Clear the subtype from register P1. +*/ +case OP_ClrSubtype: { /* in1 */ + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + pIn1->flags &= ~MEM_Subtype; + break; +} + +/* Opcode: FilterAdd P1 * P3 P4 * +** Synopsis: filter(P1) += key(P3@P4) +** +** Compute a hash on the P4 registers starting with r[P3] and +** add that hash to the bloom filter contained in r[P1]. +*/ +case OP_FilterAdd: { + u64 h; + + assert( pOp->p1>0 && pOp->p1<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + assert( pIn1->flags & MEM_Blob ); + assert( pIn1->n>0 ); + h = filterHash(aMem, pOp); +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ + int ii; + for(ii=pOp->p3; ii<pOp->p3+pOp->p4.i; ii++){ + registerTrace(ii, &aMem[ii]); + } + printf("hash: %llu modulo %d -> %u\n", h, pIn1->n, (int)(h%pIn1->n)); + } +#endif + h %= pIn1->n; + pIn1->z[h/8] |= 1<<(h&7); + break; +} + +/* Opcode: Filter P1 P2 P3 P4 * +** Synopsis: if key(P3@P4) not in filter(P1) goto P2 +** +** Compute a hash on the key contained in the P4 registers starting +** with r[P3]. Check to see if that hash is found in the +** bloom filter hosted by register P1. If it is not present then +** maybe jump to P2. Otherwise fall through. +** +** False negatives are harmless. It is always safe to fall through, +** even if the value is in the bloom filter. A false negative causes +** more CPU cycles to be used, but it should still yield the correct +** answer. However, an incorrect answer may well arise from a +** false positive - if the jump is taken when it should fall through. +*/ +case OP_Filter: { /* jump */ + u64 h; + + assert( pOp->p1>0 && pOp->p1<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor) ); + pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + assert( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Blob)!=0 ); + assert( pIn1->n >= 1 ); + h = filterHash(aMem, pOp); +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ + int ii; + for(ii=pOp->p3; ii<pOp->p3+pOp->p4.i; ii++){ + registerTrace(ii, &aMem[ii]); + } + printf("hash: %llu modulo %d -> %u\n", h, pIn1->n, (int)(h%pIn1->n)); + } +#endif + h %= pIn1->n; + if( (pIn1->z[h/8] & (1<<(h&7)))==0 ){ + VdbeBranchTaken(1, 2); + p->aCounter[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FILTER_HIT]++; + goto jump_to_p2; + }else{ + p->aCounter[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FILTER_MISS]++; + VdbeBranchTaken(0, 2); + } + break; +} + +/* Opcode: Trace P1 P2 * P4 * +** +** Write P4 on the statement trace output if statement tracing is +** enabled. +** +** Operand P1 must be 0x7fffffff and P2 must positive. +*/ +/* Opcode: Init P1 P2 P3 P4 * +** Synopsis: Start at P2 +** +** Programs contain a single instance of this opcode as the very first +** opcode. +** +** If tracing is enabled (by the sqlite3_trace()) interface, then +** the UTF-8 string contained in P4 is emitted on the trace callback. +** Or if P4 is blank, use the string returned by sqlite3_sql(). +** +** If P2 is not zero, jump to instruction P2. +** +** Increment the value of P1 so that OP_Once opcodes will jump the +** first time they are evaluated for this run. +** +** If P3 is not zero, then it is an address to jump to if an SQLITE_CORRUPT +** error is encountered. +*/ +case OP_Trace: +case OP_Init: { /* jump */ + int i; +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRACE + char *zTrace; +#endif + + /* If the P4 argument is not NULL, then it must be an SQL comment string. + ** The "--" string is broken up to prevent false-positives with srcck1.c. + ** + ** This assert() provides evidence for: + ** EVIDENCE-OF: R-50676-09860 The callback can compute the same text that + ** would have been returned by the legacy sqlite3_trace() interface by + ** using the X argument when X begins with "--" and invoking + ** sqlite3_expanded_sql(P) otherwise. + */ + assert( pOp->p4.z==0 || strncmp(pOp->p4.z, "-" "- ", 3)==0 ); + + /* OP_Init is always instruction 0 */ + assert( pOp==p->aOp || pOp->opcode==OP_Trace ); + +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRACE + if( (db->mTrace & (SQLITE_TRACE_STMT|SQLITE_TRACE_LEGACY))!=0 + && p->minWriteFileFormat!=254 /* tag-20220401a */ + && (zTrace = (pOp->p4.z ? pOp->p4.z : p->zSql))!=0 + ){ +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED + if( db->mTrace & SQLITE_TRACE_LEGACY ){ + char *z = sqlite3VdbeExpandSql(p, zTrace); + db->trace.xLegacy(db->pTraceArg, z); + sqlite3_free(z); + }else +#endif + if( db->nVdbeExec>1 ){ + char *z = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "-- %s", zTrace); + (void)db->trace.xV2(SQLITE_TRACE_STMT, db->pTraceArg, p, z); + sqlite3DbFree(db, z); + }else{ + (void)db->trace.xV2(SQLITE_TRACE_STMT, db->pTraceArg, p, zTrace); + } + } +#ifdef SQLITE_USE_FCNTL_TRACE + zTrace = (pOp->p4.z ? pOp->p4.z : p->zSql); + if( zTrace ){ + int j; + for(j=0; j<db->nDb; j++){ + if( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, j)==0 ) continue; + sqlite3_file_control(db, db->aDb[j].zDbSName, SQLITE_FCNTL_TRACE, zTrace); + } + } +#endif /* SQLITE_USE_FCNTL_TRACE */ +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + if( (db->flags & SQLITE_SqlTrace)!=0 + && (zTrace = (pOp->p4.z ? pOp->p4.z : p->zSql))!=0 + ){ + sqlite3DebugPrintf("SQL-trace: %s\n", zTrace); + } +#endif /* SQLITE_DEBUG */ +#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_TRACE */ + assert( pOp->p2>0 ); + if( pOp->p1>=sqlite3GlobalConfig.iOnceResetThreshold ){ + if( pOp->opcode==OP_Trace ) break; + for(i=1; i<p->nOp; i++){ + if( p->aOp[i].opcode==OP_Once ) p->aOp[i].p1 = 0; + } + pOp->p1 = 0; + } + pOp->p1++; + p->aCounter[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_RUN]++; + goto jump_to_p2; +} + +#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_CURSOR_HINTS +/* Opcode: CursorHint P1 * * P4 * +** +** Provide a hint to cursor P1 that it only needs to return rows that +** satisfy the Expr in P4. TK_REGISTER terms in the P4 expression refer +** to values currently held in registers. TK_COLUMN terms in the P4 +** expression refer to columns in the b-tree to which cursor P1 is pointing. +*/ +case OP_CursorHint: { + VdbeCursor *pC; + + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); + assert( pOp->p4type==P4_EXPR ); + pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; + if( pC ){ + assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); + sqlite3BtreeCursorHint(pC->uc.pCursor, BTREE_HINT_RANGE, + pOp->p4.pExpr, aMem); + } + break; +} +#endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_CURSOR_HINTS */ + +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG +/* Opcode: Abortable * * * * * +** +** Verify that an Abort can happen. Assert if an Abort at this point +** might cause database corruption. This opcode only appears in debugging +** builds. +** +** An Abort is safe if either there have been no writes, or if there is +** an active statement journal. +*/ +case OP_Abortable: { + sqlite3VdbeAssertAbortable(p); + break; +} +#endif + +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG +/* Opcode: ReleaseReg P1 P2 P3 * P5 +** Synopsis: release r[P1@P2] mask P3 +** +** Release registers from service. Any content that was in the +** the registers is unreliable after this opcode completes. +** +** The registers released will be the P2 registers starting at P1, +** except if bit ii of P3 set, then do not release register P1+ii. +** In other words, P3 is a mask of registers to preserve. +** +** Releasing a register clears the Mem.pScopyFrom pointer. That means +** that if the content of the released register was set using OP_SCopy, +** a change to the value of the source register for the OP_SCopy will no longer +** generate an assertion fault in sqlite3VdbeMemAboutToChange(). +** +** If P5 is set, then all released registers have their type set +** to MEM_Undefined so that any subsequent attempt to read the released +** register (before it is reinitialized) will generate an assertion fault. +** +** P5 ought to be set on every call to this opcode. +** However, there are places in the code generator will release registers +** before their are used, under the (valid) assumption that the registers +** will not be reallocated for some other purpose before they are used and +** hence are safe to release. +** +** This opcode is only available in testing and debugging builds. It is +** not generated for release builds. The purpose of this opcode is to help +** validate the generated bytecode. This opcode does not actually contribute +** to computing an answer. +*/ +case OP_ReleaseReg: { + Mem *pMem; + int i; + u32 constMask; + assert( pOp->p1>0 ); + assert( pOp->p1+pOp->p2<=(p->nMem+1 - p->nCursor)+1 ); + pMem = &aMem[pOp->p1]; + constMask = pOp->p3; + for(i=0; i<pOp->p2; i++, pMem++){ + if( i>=32 || (constMask & MASKBIT32(i))==0 ){ + pMem->pScopyFrom = 0; + if( i<32 && pOp->p5 ) MemSetTypeFlag(pMem, MEM_Undefined); + } + } + break; +} +#endif + +/* Opcode: Noop * * * * * +** +** Do nothing. This instruction is often useful as a jump +** destination. +*/ +/* +** The magic Explain opcode are only inserted when explain==2 (which +** is to say when the EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN syntax is used.) +** This opcode records information from the optimizer. It is the +** the same as a no-op. This opcodesnever appears in a real VM program. +*/ +default: { /* This is really OP_Noop, OP_Explain */ + assert( pOp->opcode==OP_Noop || pOp->opcode==OP_Explain ); + + break; +} + +/***************************************************************************** +** The cases of the switch statement above this line should all be indented +** by 6 spaces. But the left-most 6 spaces have been removed to improve the +** readability. From this point on down, the normal indentation rules are +** restored. +*****************************************************************************/ + } + +#ifdef VDBE_PROFILE + { + u64 endTime = sqlite3NProfileCnt ? sqlite3NProfileCnt : sqlite3Hwtime(); + if( endTime>start ) pOrigOp->cycles += endTime - start; + pOrigOp->cnt++; + } +#endif + + /* The following code adds nothing to the actual functionality + ** of the program. It is only here for testing and debugging. + ** On the other hand, it does burn CPU cycles every time through + ** the evaluator loop. So we can leave it out when NDEBUG is defined. + */ +#ifndef NDEBUG + assert( pOp>=&aOp[-1] && pOp<&aOp[p->nOp-1] ); + +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + if( db->flags & SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ + u8 opProperty = sqlite3OpcodeProperty[pOrigOp->opcode]; + if( rc!=0 ) printf("rc=%d\n",rc); + if( opProperty & (OPFLG_OUT2) ){ + registerTrace(pOrigOp->p2, &aMem[pOrigOp->p2]); + } + if( opProperty & OPFLG_OUT3 ){ + registerTrace(pOrigOp->p3, &aMem[pOrigOp->p3]); + } + if( opProperty==0xff ){ + /* Never happens. This code exists to avoid a harmless linkage + ** warning aboud sqlite3VdbeRegisterDump() being defined but not + ** used. */ + sqlite3VdbeRegisterDump(p); + } + } +#endif /* SQLITE_DEBUG */ +#endif /* NDEBUG */ + } /* The end of the for(;;) loop the loops through opcodes */ + + /* If we reach this point, it means that execution is finished with + ** an error of some kind. + */ +abort_due_to_error: + if( db->mallocFailed ){ + rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; + }else if( rc==SQLITE_IOERR_CORRUPTFS ){ + rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; + } + assert( rc ); +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG + if( db->flags & SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ + const char *zTrace = p->zSql; + if( zTrace==0 ){ + if( aOp[0].opcode==OP_Trace ){ + zTrace = aOp[0].p4.z; + } + if( zTrace==0 ) zTrace = "???"; + } + printf("ABORT-due-to-error (rc=%d): %s\n", rc, zTrace); + } +#endif + if( p->zErrMsg==0 && rc!=SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM ){ + sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", sqlite3ErrStr(rc)); + } + p->rc = rc; + sqlite3SystemError(db, rc); + testcase( sqlite3GlobalConfig.xLog!=0 ); + sqlite3_log(rc, "statement aborts at %d: [%s] %s", + (int)(pOp - aOp), p->zSql, p->zErrMsg); + if( p->eVdbeState==VDBE_RUN_STATE ) sqlite3VdbeHalt(p); + if( rc==SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM ) sqlite3OomFault(db); + if( rc==SQLITE_CORRUPT && db->autoCommit==0 ){ + db->flags |= SQLITE_CorruptRdOnly; + } + rc = SQLITE_ERROR; + if( resetSchemaOnFault>0 ){ + sqlite3ResetOneSchema(db, resetSchemaOnFault-1); + } + + /* This is the only way out of this procedure. We have to + ** release the mutexes on btrees that were acquired at the + ** top. */ +vdbe_return: +#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PROGRESS_CALLBACK + while( nVmStep>=nProgressLimit && db->xProgress!=0 ){ + nProgressLimit += db->nProgressOps; + if( db->xProgress(db->pProgressArg) ){ + nProgressLimit = LARGEST_UINT64; + rc = SQLITE_INTERRUPT; + goto abort_due_to_error; + } + } +#endif + p->aCounter[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_VM_STEP] += (int)nVmStep; + sqlite3VdbeLeave(p); + assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || nExtraDelete==0 + || sqlite3_strlike("DELETE%",p->zSql,0)!=0 + ); + return rc; + + /* Jump to here if a string or blob larger than SQLITE_MAX_LENGTH + ** is encountered. + */ +too_big: + sqlite3VdbeError(p, "string or blob too big"); + rc = SQLITE_TOOBIG; + goto abort_due_to_error; + + /* Jump to here if a malloc() fails. + */ +no_mem: + sqlite3OomFault(db); + sqlite3VdbeError(p, "out of memory"); + rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT; + goto abort_due_to_error; + + /* Jump to here if the sqlite3_interrupt() API sets the interrupt + ** flag. + */ +abort_due_to_interrupt: + assert( AtomicLoad(&db->u1.isInterrupted) ); + rc = SQLITE_INTERRUPT; + goto abort_due_to_error; +} |